BP-50M45 - Photocopier SHARP - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Monochrome Digital Photocopier / Multifunction Printer
Model Number	BP-50M45
Brand	Sharp
Dimensions (W x D x H)	Approx. 585 x 585 x 770 mm
Weight	Approx. 55 kg
Power Supply	AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption	Max 1.5 kW (During operation), 0.8 W (Standby)
Copy Speed	Up to 50 ppm (A4)
Copy Resolution	600 x 600 dpi
Scan Resolution	Up to 600 x 600 dpi (optical)
Print Functions	Built-in network printing (optional)
Paper Tray Capacity	Standard: 600 sheets (2 trays), Max: 2,100 sheets
Paper Sizes Supported	A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, Letter, Legal
Warm-up Time	Approx. 20 seconds
First Copy Time	Approx. 4.0 seconds
Maintenance	Regular cleaning of glass, drum, and fuser unit; replace toner and waste toner box as needed
Safety	Auto shut-off, fuser overheat protection, safety lock for optional finisher
Parts & Repairability	Toner cartridge (BP-50M45), drum unit, fuser unit, paper feed rollers; user-replaceable with instructions
General Information	Digital monochrome copier with optional printer/scanner modules; designed for medium-volume office use

Frequently Asked Questions - BP-50M45 SHARP

How do I load paper into the Sharp BP-50M45?

Open the paper tray, adjust the guides to the paper size, and stack the paper neatly. Make sure the paper is below the max fill line. Close the tray and check the paper size setting on the control panel.

How do I clear a paper jam?

Open the front cover and remove any jammed paper gently. Check the fuser area and paper feed rollers. Refer to the jam location diagrams in the manual. Close all covers securely.

How do I replace the toner cartridge?

Open the front cover, pull out the old toner cartridge, and insert the new one until it clicks. Shake the new cartridge gently before installation. Close the cover and reset the toner counter if needed.

How do I connect the copier to a network?

Ensure the optional network interface card is installed. Connect an Ethernet cable from the copier to your router. On the control panel, go to System Settings > Network and assign an IP address automatically or manually.

Why is the copy quality poor?

Check the original document for smudges. Clean the scanner glass with a soft, lint-free cloth. Also check toner level and drum condition. Run a calibration from the maintenance menu.

How do I perform a maintenance reset?

After replacing the drum or toner, access the maintenance mode by pressing specific keys (e.g., #, *, C, and Interrupt). Follow the on-screen prompts to reset counters. Refer to the manual for exact key sequence.

Can I print from a mobile device?

Yes, if the copier is connected to a network and supports Mobile Print or AirPrint. Download the Sharp Print Utility app to send print jobs from your smartphone or tablet.

How do I set the copier to duplex?

On the control panel, press the Duplex button (or navigate to Copy Settings > Original > 2-Sided). Select the desired duplex mode (e.g., 1→2, 2→2). Press Start.

What does the error code 'E7-01' mean?

Error code E7-01 indicates a fuser unit malfunction. Turn off the copier, wait 10 minutes, and turn it back on. If the error persists, the fuser may need replacement. Contact a qualified service technician.

How do I clean the drum unit?

Open the front cover and remove the drum unit carefully. Avoid direct light exposure. Wipe the drum surface gently with a drum cleaning cloth from a dry toner vacuum. Do not touch the drum surface.

USER MANUAL BP-50M45 SHARP

Functions of the machine and procedures for placing originals and loading paper

Operation of the touch screen and customisation of the user interface

COPIER

Using the copy function

PRINTER

Using the printer function

FACSIMILE

Using the fax function

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Using the scan / Internet fax function

DOCUMENT FILING

Storing jobs as files on the local drive

CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE

Useful features of this machine

SETTING MODE

Configuring settings to make the machine easier to use

TROUBLESHOOTING

Questions and answers and care instructions

APPENDIX

About the specifications

Click to go to chapter index

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Click a button below to move to the page that you wish to view.

The following explanation assumes that Adobe Reader is being used (Some buttons do not appear in the default state.).

(1) Return to top page button

If an operation does not proceed as expected, click this button to start over again.

(2) Back one page button

Displays the previous page.

(3) Forward one page button

Displays the next page.

(4) Return to previously displayed page button

Displays the page that was displayed before the current page.

(5) Title button

Displays the page of the title indicated by the button.

(6) Contents button

Displays the contents of each chapter.

For example, if the current page is part of the printer chapter, the table of contents of the printer chapter appears.

If a button does not appear, refer to Adobe Reader Help to display the button.

ABOUT OPERATION MANUAL

This manual explains how to use the BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65/BP-70M31/BP-70M36/BP-70M45/BP-70M55/BP-70M65 digital multifunctional system.

Please note

• For information on installing the drivers and software cited in this manual, please refer to the Software Setup Guide.
• For information on your operating system, please refer to your operating system manual or the online Help function.
• The explanations of screens and procedures in a Windows environment are primarily for Windows® 10. The screens may be different depending on the version of the operating system or the software application.
• The explanations of screens and procedures for use in a macOS environment generally assume that macOS 11 is being used and a PPD driver is installed. The screens may be different depending on the version of the operating system or the software application.
• Wherever "BP-xxxx" appears in this manual, please substitute your model name for "xxxxx".
• This manual contains references to the fax function. However, please note that the fax function is not available in some countries and regions.
• Considerable care has been taken in preparing this manual. If you have any comments or concerns about the manual, please contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
• This product has undergone strict quality control and inspection procedures. In the unlikely event that a defect or other problem is discovered, please contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
• Aside from instances provided for by law, SHARP is not responsible for failures occurring during the use of the product or its options, or failures due to incorrect operation of the product and its options, or other failures, or for any damage that occurs due to use of the product.

Warning

• Reproduction, adaptation or translation of the contents of the manual without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under copyright laws.
• All information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

Illustrations and the operation panel and touch panel shown in this manual

The peripheral devices are generally optional, however, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment. The explanations in this manual assume that a paper drawer is installed on the BP-70M65.

For some functions and procedures, the explanations assume that devices other than the above are installed.

The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine due to product improvements and modifications.

Icons used in the manuals

The icons in the manuals indicate the following types of information:

	This alerts you to a situation that could result in death or serious personal injury. This alerts you to a situation that could result in personal injury or damage to properties.		This explains how to stop or correct an operation.
	This alerts you to a situation where there is a risk of machine damage or failure.		This describes a routine work relevant to setting mode.
	This supplements function or operation procedure.

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

PART NAMES AND FUNCTION.... 1-2

EXTERIOR 1-2

INTERIOR 1-4

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND DOCUMENT

GLASS 1-5

SIDE AND BACK 1-6

OPERATION PANEL 1-7

INFORMATION INDICATOR 1-8

NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS 1-11

THE DEFINITION OF "R" IN PAPER SIZE ..... 1-11

APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES 1-12

TRAY 1 - 4 (when a stand/550/2x550/3x550/ 550&2100

sheet paper drawer is installed)....1-15

LOADING ENVELOPE IN TRAY 1. 1-17

TRAY 3 - 4 (when a stand/550&2100 sheet paper

drawer is installed) 1-18

LOADING PAPER IN THE LARGE-CAPACITY TRAY

(when a large capacity tray is installed) 1-20

LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY.....1-22

HOW TO LOAD THE PAPER....1-22

LOADING TAB PAPER 1-22

INSERTING TRANSPARENCY FILM 1-23

LOADING ENVELOPES 1-23

HOW TO PLACE THE LONG PAPER GUIDE.....1-27

HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL

SELECTING A PROCEDURE FOR PLACING THE

ORIGINAL DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND STATUS

OF THE ORIGINAL 1-28

DETECTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES 1-28

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER....1-30

PREVENTIVE LIGHT TO INDICATE ORIGINAL LEFT

BEHIND 1-33

ORIGINAL SETTING INDICATOR....1-34

SKEW FEED PREVENTION 1-34

DOUBLE FEED DETECTION 1-34

DOCUMENT GLASS....1-35

PERIPHERAL DEVICES

PERIPHERAL DEVICES 1-37

INNER FINISHER....1-39

PART NAMES....1-39

HOW TO STAPLE MANUALLY 1-40

SUPPLIES....1-41

INNER FINISHER MAINTENANCE .....1-41

FINISHER....1-43

PART NAMES. 1-43

SUPPLIES....1-44

HOW TO STAPLE MANUALLY 1-47

SUPPLIES....1-48

FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) MAINTENANCE.....1-48

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER....1-50

PART NAMES....1-50

SUPPLIES....1-51

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER MAINTENANCE .....1-51

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (LARGE STACKER)....1-54

PART NAMES. 1-54

HOW TO STAPLE MANUALLY 1-55

SUPPLIES....1-56

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (LARGE STACKER)

MAINTENANCE 1-56

PUNCH MODULE 1-60

DISCARDING PUNCH WASTE 1-60

FOLDING UNIT 1-66

PART NAMES....1-66

MAINTENANCE

REGULAR MAINTENANCE 1-67

CLEANING THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER .....1-67

CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER .....1-70

CLEANING THE PAPER FEED ROLLER. 1-71

REPLACEMENT OF TONER CARTRIDGE .....1-72

REPLACEMENT MESSAGE....1-72

REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION

CONTAINER 1-75

REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE 1-77

WHEN USING THE BP-70M31 / BP-70M36 /

BP-70M45 / BP-70M55 / BP-70M65 ..... 1-77

WHEN USING THE BP-50M26 / BP-50M31 /

BP-50M36 / BP-50M45 / BP-50M55 / BP-50M65 .....1-79

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

PART NAMES AND FUNCTION EXTERIOR

(1) Output tray (exit tray cabinet) *1

Received faxes and printed papers are delivered to this tray.

(2) Job separator tray (upper tray) *2

Output is delivered to this tray. You can also output jobs to the job separator (centre tray) when a relay unit is installed.

(3) Automatic document feeder

It automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned. For the BP-70M31/BP-70M36/BP-70M45/BP-70M55/BP-70M65 both sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned at one time. ▶ AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

(4) Operation panel

This panel hosts the [Power] button, Information indicator and touch panel. Use the touch panel to operate each of these functions. An NFC touch point area mark also appears. ▶ OPERATION PANEL (page 1-7)

(5) Keyboard *3

Use this as a substitute for the soft keyboard displayed on the touch panel. When not being used, it can be stored under the operation panel.

(6) USB port (A type)

This is used to connect a USB device such as a USB memory device to the machine. Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).

(7) Exit tray unit (right tray) *2

Set this tray as the output tray if needed.

(8) Folding unit *2

This folds and outputs paper. ▶ FOLDING UNIT(page 1-66)

(9) Inner finisher *2*

This staples paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper. You can also perform stapling manually. ▶ INNER FINISHER(page 1-39)

(10) Front cover

Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off" to replace a toner cartridge. ▶ TURNING ON THE POWER (page 1-10)

(11) Saddle Stitch Finisher (large stacker) *1

This staples and folds paper.

A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper.

You can also perform stapling manually.

▶ SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) (page 1-54)

(12) Paper pass unit *1

Relay between the machine and the finisher, finisher (large stacker), saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker).

(13) Motion sensor *2

This sensor detects the presence of a person that approaches the machine, and automatically wakes the machine from sleep mode. (Motion Sensor Mode Only)

(14) Utility table *2

You can use this as a work platform, or temporarily place originals or a mobile device.

• Do not place anything that weighs more than 5kg or otherwise apply a load.
• Do not place a container that contains water or other liquid. Risk of fire and electrical shock if the liquid spills and enters the machine.
• Working on the table while the machine is in operation may cause poor image quality or other problems.

(15) Bypass tray

Use this tray to feed paper manually. When loading paper larger than A4R or 8-1/2" x 11"R, pull out the extension guide. ▶ LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-22)

(16) Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray is installed) *1

Store paper in this tray.

▶ LOADING PAPER IN THE LARGE-CAPACITY TRAY (when a large capacity tray is installed) (page 1-20)

(17) Finisher *1

This staples paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper. ▶ FINISHER(page 1-43)

(18) Saddle stitch finisher *1

This staples and folds paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper. ▶ SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (page 1-50)

*1 Peripheral device. Equipped standard or not available in some countries and regions. Not available on some models. Contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative. *2 This device can only be equipped on the BP-70M31/BP-70M36/BP-70M45/BP-70M55/BP-70M65.

(19) Finisher (large stacker) *1

This staples paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper. You can also perform stapling manually. ▶ FINISHER (LARGE STACKER)(page 1-46)

(20) Punch module *1

This is used to punch holes in output. Requires an inner finisher, finisher, finisher (large stacker), saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker).

(21) Tray 1

Store paper in this tray.

▶ TRAY 1 - 4 (when a stand/550/2x550/3x550/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed) (page 1-15)

(22) Tray 3 (when a stand/2x550/3x550 sheet paper drawer is installed) *1

Store paper in this tray.

TRAY 1 - 4 (when a stand/550/2x550/3x550/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed) (page 1-15)

(23) Tray 4 (when a stand/3x550 sheet paper drawer is installed) *1 Store paper in this tray.

TRAY 1 - 4 (when a stand/550/2x550/3x550/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed) (page 1-15)

(24) Tray 2 (when a low stand/550 sheet paper drawer or stand/550/2x550/3x550/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed) *1

Store paper in this tray.

TRAY 1 - 4 (when a stand/550/2x550/3x550/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed) (page 1-15)

(25) Tray 4 (when a stand/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed) *1 Store paper in this tray.

TRAY 3 - 4 (when a stand/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed) (page 1-18)

(26) Tray 3 (when a stand/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed) *1 Store paper in this tray.

TRAY 3 - 4 (when a stand/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed) (page 1-18)

INTERIOR

(9) (10) (11) (12)

(1) Main power switch

Use this switch to turn on the power for the machine. When using the fax or Internet fax functions, always keep this switch in the "1" position.

▶ TURNING ON THE POWER (page 1-10)

(2) Toner cartridge

This cartridge contains toner. When the toner in a cartridge runs out, replace with new one.

REPLACEMENT OF TONER CARTRIDGE (page 1-72)

(3) Toner collection container

This container collects excess toner that remains after printing.

REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION CONTAINER (page 1-75)

A service technician collects replaced toner collection container.

(4) Fusing unit

Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper.

The fusing unit is hot.

Take care not to burn yourself when removing a misfeed.

(5) Photoconductive drum

Images are formed on the photoconductive drum.

Do not touch, damage the photoconductive drum, or expose it to direct sunlight or other strong light. This may cause a defective image.

(6) Right side cover release lever

To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover.

(7) Right side cover

Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.

(8) Paper reversing section cover

This unit is used for reversing paper when 2-sided printing is performed. Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.

(9) Toner collection container release button

Press this button when you need to release the Toner collection container lock to replace the Toner collection container.

REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION CONTAINER (page 1-75)

(10) Handle

Pull this out and grasp it when moving the machine.

(11) Stand/550/2x550/3x550/550&2100 sheet paper drawer right-side cover

Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 2, 3 and 4.

(12) Paper tray right side cover

Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 1.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND DOCUMENT GLASS

BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65

BP-70M31/BP-70M36/BP-70M45/BP-70M55/BP-70M65

(1) Paper feed roller

This roller rotates to automatically feed the original.

(2) Document feeding cover

Open this cover to remove an original misfeed.

This cover is also opened to clean the paper feed roller.

▶ CLEANING THE PAPER FEED ROLLER (page 1-71)

(3) Original guides

These guides help ensure that the original is scanned correctly.

Adjust the guides to the width of the original.

(4) Document feeder tray

Place the original.

Place the original with the print side facing up.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

(5) Original exit tray

The original is discharged to this tray after scanning.

ORIGINAL SETTING INDICATOR (page 1-34)

(6) Original setting indicator

This indicator lights when the document is correctly loaded on the document feeder tray.

▶ ORIGINAL SETTING INDICATOR (page 1-34)

(7) Scanning area

Originals placed in the automatic document feeder are scanned here.

▶ CLEANING THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-67)

(8) Original size detector

This unit detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.

▶ DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

(9) Document glass

If you want to scan books or other thick originals that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder, place them on this glass.

▶ DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

SIDE AND BACK

(1) External phone socket (TEL) *

When the fax function of the machine is used, an external phone can be connected to this socket.

(2) Telephone line socket (LINE)

When the fax function of the machine is used, the telephone line is connected to this socket.

(3) USB port (A type)

This is used to connect a USB device such as a USB memory device to the machine.

Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed) and USB3.0 (SuperSpeed).

* Peripheral device

(4) USB port (B type)

The machine does not use this connector.

(5) LAN connector

Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network. Use a shielded LAN cable.

(6) Power plug

OPERATION PANEL

This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts of the operation panel.

(1) Information indicator

This indicator illuminates when the power to the machine is turned on, and when a user logs in to the machine.

▶ INFORMATION INDICATOR(page 1-8)

(2) Touch panel

Messages and keys appear on the touch panel display. Operate the machine by directly tapping the displayed keys.

TOUCH PANEL(page 2-2)

(3) Main power indicator

This indicator lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the " " position.

Blinks blue during the time that the [Power] button does not operate immediately after the main power switch is switched on.

This indicator will also blink blue when receiving printer data.

This indicator blinks yellow during Auto Power Shut-Off mode.

▶ TURNINGON THE POWER (page 1-10)

(4) [Power] button

Use this button to turn the machine's power on and off.

▶ TURNINGON THE POWER (page 1-10)

(5) NFC touch point area

You can easily connect a mobile device to the machine by touching the mobile device.

CONNECTING BY NFC (page 8-37)

You can change the angle of the operation panel.

- The touch panel is a capacitance type.

- Use your finger to operate the touch panel. If you operate it with a pen, it may not work properly. Also, be aware that precious metals such as accessories may cause unintended touch movements.

- Do not touch the touch panel while the unit is starting up. If you touch the touch panel, it may not operate normally. Example:

Turn on the main power switch, press the [Power] button, and wait until the home screen is displayed. Returning from auto power shutoff.

INFORMATION INDICATOR

When turning the machine power ON/OFF; at user authentication when the user has logged in using IC card or NFC; when connecting USB memory to the machine; when starting a job on the machine control panel; or during image adjustment or when adding toner; a fax is being received or an error has occurred in the machine, the LED lights blue, white and orange in response to the request/operation from the user to communicate to the user the machine status.

This light is used to communicate with users in front of the machine, therefore this is not lit as a result of remote operations.

Lighting patterns

Lighting patterns differ depending on status.

Lighting colour	Lighting patterns	Status
Blue	Lighting pattern 1	When the power is turned on by user operation or motion sensor, when the power is turned off by user operation, when the power is restored from sleep mode*1, when the power is shifted to sleep mode*1, and when a job (copy, scan, fax) is started by the operation panel.
	Lighting pattern 2	During user authentication, at user login using an IC card or NFC Insertion of USB memory into the machine
	Lighting pattern 3	When users are made to wait, during image quality adjustment or adding toner
White	Blinks	A fax is being received. when the job separator (upper tray) or exit tray unit (right tray) is used for output, this blinks until the output is removed.
Orange Solidly *2		Errors that do not stop machine operation, such as replacement timing of the toner collection container.
		Errors that stop machine operation, such as misfeeds and out of toner.

*1 The information lamp lights up when the power is turned on or off directly by the user, or when the machine is restored from sleep mode. The information lamp does not light up when the printer is not operated directly by the user, such as when receiving a print job or when the scheduled auto power shut-off is turned on or off. *2 If the lighted state and the blinking state overlap, the blinking state takes priority.

Lighting pattern 1

After lighting sporadically, all lights come on together, and then turn off.

Lighting pattern 2

The center light comes on, the left and right lights come on, then the center light turns off.

Lighting pattern 3

Lights come on in succession, from the left lamp to the right lamp.

If there are multiple lighting patterns for the information indicator, then the one that is later has priority. The previous information indicator lighting pattern turns off, then the information indicator lights in accordance with the later generated lighting pattern.

However, if lighting pattern 3 and another lighting pattern overlap, then lighting pattern 3 will have priority, and the other pattern will not be received until lighting pattern 3 is completed.

This section describes how to turn on/off the machine's power and how to restart the machine.

Operate two power switches: the main power switch inside the front cover, located in the lower left corner, and the [Power] button on the operation panel.

Main power switch

• When turning off the main power switch, be sure to press the [Power] button on the operation panel, tap the [Turn off] key on the touch panel, and then set the main power switch to the "position.
• In a sudden case of main power outage, turn the power for the machine back on and then turn it off in the correct order. If the machine is left for a long time with the main power having been turned off prior to the [Power] button being turned off, abnormal noises, degraded image quality or other problems may result.
• Turn off both the [Power] button and the main power switch and unplug the power cord if you suspect a machine failure, if there is a bad thunderstorm nearby, or when you are moving the machine.

• When using the fax or Internet fax function, always keep the main power switch in the " | " position.
• If the fax function will be used, and in particular if reception or timer transmission will take place at night, do not turn the main power off.
• In order for some settings to take effect, the machine must be restarted. In some states of the machine, restarting with the [Power] button may not make the settings take effect. In this case, turn off the main power switch and then turn it on again.

• Turn the main power switch to the "1" position.
• When the main power indicator lights in blue, press the [Power] button.

After pressing the [Power] button, tap the [Turn off] key on the touch panel.

To turn off the power for a long time, press the [Power] button to turn off the power, and after the screen display on the operation panel disappears, set the main power switch to the "↑" position.

RESTART THE MACHINE

Press the [Power] button to turn off the power, and then tap the [Turn off] key on the touch panel. After that, press the [Power] button again to turn on the power.

LOADING PAPER

IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER

NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS

THE DEFINITION OF "R" IN PAPER SIZE

To indicate the landscape setting, "R" is added to the end of the name of a paper size enabled for both landscape and portrait settings.

Paper that can be set either in the portrait or landscape orientation Paper that can only be set in the landscape orientation
A4, B5, 8-1/2" x 11"		A3W, A3, B4, 12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13"
Paper set in the landscape orientation	Paper set in the portrait orientation	Can be placed only in the landscape orientation

APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES

This section describes paper types that can be used and those that cannot be used.

All types of paper other than plain paper are referred to as special media.

• Various types of paper are commercially available, some of which cannot be used on the machine. Before using any paper, consult the dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
• The image quality and toner fusibility of paper may change due to ambient conditions, operating conditions, and paper characteristics, resulting in image quality inferior to that of Sharp standard paper. Before using any paper, consult the dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
• The use of non-recommended or non-usable paper may result in skewed feeding, misfeeds, poor toner fusing (the toner does not adhere to the paper well and can be rubbed off), or machine failure.
• The use of non-recommended paper may result in misfeeds or poor image quality. Before using non-recommended paper, check whether printing can be performed properly.

Useable paper

Specifications of plain paper, heavy paper and thin paper

Plain Paper*	Plain Paper 1	60 g/m2 to 89 g/m2 (16 lbs. bond to 24 lbs. bond)
	Plain Paper 2	90 g/m2 to 105 g/m2 (24 lbs. bond to 28 lbs. bond)
Heavy paper	Heavy paper 1	106 g/m2 to 176 g/m2 (28 lbs. bond to 65 lbs. cover)
	Heavy paper 2	177 g/m2 to 220 g/m2 (65 lbs. cover to 80 lbs. cover)
	Heavy paper 3	221 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 (80 lbs. cover to 140 lbs. index)
	Heavy paper 4	257 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 (140 lbs. index to 110 lbs. cover)
Thin paper 55 g/m		2 to 59 g/m2 (13 lbs to 16 lbs)

* If the paper that you normally use is Recycled, Pre-Punched, Pre-Printed, Letter Head, Colour, or User Type 1 to 7, set an appropriate paper weight in "Settings" – [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Paper Settings] → [Paper Tray Settings] → [Paper Weight].

• The category of "Useable paper" is based on Sharp standard paper.
• If non-recommended paper is used, print quality may be affected even if a paper type setting that accords with the above paper divisions is selected. In that case, try setting the paper type to a type that is slightly heavier or slightly lighter than normal. For more information, consult the dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
• For paper specifications, see the specifications in the "Start Guide". • Recycled paper, coloured paper and pre-punched paper must meet the same specifications as plain paper. Before using any paper, consult the dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
• If the paper that was output is significantly curled, remove the paper from the cassette, turn the paper over so it is face down, and resume use.

Paper that can be used for the fax function

A5, A5R, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11" R, A4, A4R, 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2", B4, A3

(5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17", A4, A4R)

Specifications of paper that can be used for two-sided printing

Paper Type	Plain, Recycled, Colour, Letter Head, Pre-Printed, Punched, Heavy Paper (106 g/m2(28 lbs. bond) to 256 g/m2(140 lbs. index))
Paper Size	A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R

Types of paper that can be set in each tray

• For detailed information on the sizes and types of paper that can be loaded into each tray of the machine, see "SPECIFICATIONS" in the "Start Guide" and "Paper Tray Settings (page 9-132)". • Recycled paper, coloured paper and pre-punched paper must meet the same specifications as plain paper. Before using any paper, consult the dealer or nearest authorised service representative.

	Tray 1 Tray 2	*1Tray 3+2 Tray 4+3	Tray 3Tray 4+4	Trays 5+5	Bypass tray
Plain Paper 1*6	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted
Plain Paper 2*6	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted
Heavy Paper 1*7	Permitted	Permitted	-	Permitted	Permitted
Heavy Paper 2*7	Permitted	Permitted	-	Permitted	Permitted
Heavy Paper 3*7	Permitted Permitted	-- Permitted
Heavy Paper 4*7	Permitted Permitted	-- Permitted
Thin Paper*8	---- Permitted
Pre-Printed	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted
Recycle Paper	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted
Letter Head	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted
Pre-Punched	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted
Colour	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted	Permitted
Labels ---- Permitted
Glossy Paper	---- Permitted
Transparency	---- Permitted
Tab Paper	---- Permitted
Envelope*9	Permitted*10	--- Permitted

*1 When a stand/550 sheet paper drawer/stand/2x550 sheet paper drawer/stand/3x550 sheet paper drawer/stand/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed. *2 When a stand/2x550/3x550 sheet paper drawer is installed *3 When a stand/3x550 sheet paper drawer is installed *4 When a stand/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed *5 When a large capacity tray is installed. *6 "Plain Paper 1" is plain paper 60 to 89 g/m² (16 to 24 lbs. bond), "Plain Paper 2" is plain paper 90 to 105 g/m² (24 to 28 lbs. bond). *7 "Heavy Paper 1" is heavy paper up to 176 g/m² (65 lbs. cover), "Heavy Paper 2" is heavy paper up to 220 g/m² (80 lbs. cover), "Heavy Paper 3" is heavy paper up to 256 g/m² (140 lbs. index), and "Heavy Paper 4" is heavy paper up to 300 g/m² (110 lbs. cover). *8 Thin paper of A6R size cannot be used. *9 For envelopes that can be used, see "Paper Tray Settings (page 9-132)". *10 Some envelopes may not be usable due to the shape of the flap or the type of envelope. Depending on the countries or regions, envelopes may not be available.

Setting orientation of the print side

The setting orientation varies for the print side of paper, depending on the tray used. For "Letter Head" and "Pre-Printed", set the paper in the reverse orientation.

Place with the print side facing the direction indicated below.

Tray In normal	status	With letter head or pre-printed paper set
Trays 1 - 4 Facing up Facing down
Bypass, Tray 5 Facing down Facing up	up

When [Disabling of Duplex] is set for "Letter Head" or "Pre-Printed", set the print side in the same orientation as for the ordinary operation.

Paper that cannot be used

• Embossed
• Special media for an ink jet printer (fine paper, glossy paper, glossy film, etc.) • Carbon paper or thermal paper
• Pasted paper
• Paper with clips • Paper with fold marks
• Torn paper • Oil-feed transparency film • Thin paper less than 55 g/m² (15 lbs) • Heavy paper as thick as 300 g/m² (110 lbs. cover) over
• Irregularly shaped paper
• Stapled paper
• Damp paper
• Curled paper
• Paper with a wave-like pattern due to moisture absorption • Paper with creases
• Paper with dust

- Paper whose print side or reverse side has been already printed on by printer or multifunction device.

Non-recommended paper

• Iron-on transfer paper
• Perforated paper

TRAY 1 - 4 (when a stand/550/2x550/3x550/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed)

A maximum of 550 sheets of paper from size A6R to A3W (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R to 12" x 18") can be loaded into tray 1. A maximum of 550 sheets of paper from size A5 to A3W (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R to 12" x 18") can be loaded into trays 2 to 4. Envelopes can be loaded up to 50 sheets or the height of the indicator line, or up to 200 sheets for 106 g/m² to 220 g/m² (28 lbs. bond to 80 lbs. cover) heavy paper and up to 100 sheets for 221 g/m² to 300 g/m² (80 lbs. cover to 110 lbs. cover) heavy paper in Tray 1.

• If you loaded paper of a different type or size from the paper previously loaded, be sure to check the settings in "Settings (administrator)". Incorrect setting affects automatic paper selection action. It may cause print failure, printing on paper of a wrong size or type or paper misfeeds.
• Depending on the countries or regions, envelopes may not be available.

Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.

1

Pull out the paper tray.

Gently pull the tray out until it stops. To load paper, go to step 3. To load a different size of paper, go to the next step.

Pull the handle until the lock is released.

2

Adjust guide plates A and B to match the longitudinal and transversal dimensions of the paper to be loaded.

The guide plates A and B are slidable. Squeeze the separator plate lever and slide to the desired paper size. Adjust to the non-standard paper size so that the paper will not be too loose or too tight.

3

Fan the paper.

Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned, multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.

4

Insert the paper into the tray.

• Load the paper with the print side facing up. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 550 sheets).
• Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is fed while overlapping, it may cause a paper jam.
• After loading the paper, close the guides to the paper width not to leave the gap from the guides A and B. Do not load the paper as shown below.

5

Close the tray slowly.

Push the tray into the machine slowly.

Forcefully inserting the paper may cause skewed feeding and paper misfeeds.

LOADING ENVELOPE IN TRAY 1

Load the paper with the copy and print side facing up. The diagram shows an example of printing on the front side. The maximum number of sheets (50) may not exceed the indicator line.

Envelopes with triangular flaps cannot be used in tray 1.

Cautions when placing envelopes

• Removing curling
• Ensure these are flat, containing no air
• Ensure the four folded edges are pressed flat (for items with flaps, three edges)
• Align on a flat surface

• Before printing envelopes in tray 1, print a trial print to check the results.
• If the envelope is not folded tightly, is warped or bent, it may cause misfeeds.

TRAY 3 - 4 (when a stand/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed)

A maximum of 1200 sheets of A4 (8-1/2" × 11") paper can be loaded into tray 3 (left).

A maximum of 900 sheets of A4 (8-1/2" × 11") and B5 paper can be loaded into tray 4 (right).

If you loaded paper of a different type or size from the paper previously loaded, be sure to check the settings in "Settings". An incorrect setting may cause print failure, printing on paper of an incorrect size, or type or paper misfeeds.

To check the type and size of paper:

In the home screen or in "Settings", select [Status] → [Machine Identification] → [Paper Input Tray Status] → [Paper Tray Settings].

When the tray is open, do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.

1

Tray 3

Tray 4

Pull out the paper tray.

Gently pull the tray out until it stops.

Pull the handle until the lock is released.

2

Fan the paper.

Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned, multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.

3

Tray 3

Tray 4

Place paper into the tray.

Load the paper with the print side facing up. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 1200 sheets for tray 3, or maximum of 900 sheets for tray 4).

• Load the paper with the print side facing up. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 550 sheets).
• Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is fed while overlapping, it may cause a paper jam. • After loading the paper, close the guides to the paper width not to leave the gap from the guides A and B. Do not load the paper as shown below.

4

Tray 3

Tray 4

Close the tray slowly.

Push the tray into the machine slowly.

LOADING PAPER IN THE LARGE-CAPACITY TRAY (when a large capacity tray is installed)

The large capacity tray is used for very large print jobs that cannot be handled with a regular tray. Up to 3000 sheets of A4 or B5 (8-1/2" x 11") paper (80 g/m ² (21 lbs.)) can be loaded in the tray.

If you find it necessary to change the paper size, consult the dealer or nearest authorised service representative.

If you loaded paper of a different type from the paper previously loaded, be sure to check the settings in "Settings".

To check the paper type loaded in the tray

[Tray Settings] in the home screen or in "Settings", select [Status] → [Machine Identification] → [Paper Input Tray Status] → [Paper Tray Settings].

When the tray is open, do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.

1

Open the top cover.

2

Fan the paper.

Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned, multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.

3

Place the paper in the paper feed table.

Insert the paper into the tray until it stops.

Place the paper print side down. The stack should not exceed the indicator line (maximum 3000 sheets).

When adding paper, take care that previously loaded paper does not shift out of place. This may cause misfeeds and folding back of the front edge of the loaded paper.

4

Gently close the cover.

LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY

Use the bypass tray for printing on plain paper, envelopes, label sheets, tab paper, and other special media. Up to 100 sheets of paper can be loaded (Heavy paper weighing between 106 g/m² and 256 g/m² (28 lbs. bond and 140 lbs. index): 40 sheets, heavy paper weighing between 257 g/m² and 300 g/m² (140 lbs. index and 110 lbs. cover), transparency, tab paper, film and envelope: 20 sheets) for continuous printing, just like operation using other trays.

• When using plain paper other than Sharp standard paper or special media other than SHARP-recommended transparency film, glossy paper, or when printing on the reverse side of paper that has been printed on one side, load paper one sheet at a time. Loading more than one sheet at a time will cause misfeeds.
• Before loading paper, straighten any curling in the paper.
• When adding paper, remove any paper remaining in the bypass tray, combine it with the paper to be added, and reload as a single stack. If paper is added without removing the remaining paper, a misfeed may result. Loading more sheets than the specified number of sheets or the limit may cause paper misfeeds.

HOW TO LOAD THE PAPER

Paper smaller than A5 (7-1/4" x 10-1/2") size is loaded horizontally.

LOADING TAB PAPER

To print on tab paper, load tab paper into the bypass tray with the print side facing down.

• Use only tab paper that is made of paper. Tab paper made of a material other than paper (film, etc.) cannot be used. • To print on the tabs of tab paper:

In copy mode, use [Tab Copy] in "Others". In print mode, use the tab print function.

INSERTING TRANSPARENCY FILM

• Use SHARP-recommended transparency film.
• When loading multiple sheets of transparency film into the bypass tray, fan the sheets several times before loading.
• When printing on transparency film, remove each sheet as it is printed and output from the machine. If multiple sheets of film are allowed to stack on the output tray, the sheets may stick together or become curled.

LOADING ENVELOPES

When inserting envelopes in the bypass tray, place them aligned to the left side in the orientation shown below. Only the front side of envelopes can be printed or copied on. Place the front side facing down.

Fold the flap and make a sharp crease at the fold.

When placing DL

• Open the flap of the envelope.
• Place so that the flap is on the right.

When placing C4, C5, or C6

• Close the flap of the envelope.
• Place so that the flap is on the back side.

Important points when using envelopes

• Do not print the rear surface (the side with adhesive) of the envelope. This may result in misfeeds or poor print quality.
• Restrictions apply to some types of envelopes. For more information, consult a qualified service technician.
• Some operating environments may cause creasing, smudging, misfeeds, poor toner fusing, or machine failure.
• When placing multiple envelopes, they may not be fed if the print surface is not flat, instead being fed at an angle.
• Feeding of thick envelopes may not be possible.
• Envelopes with low surface smoothness may not be able to be fed.

- Do not use the following envelopes:

• Those with a string for closing
• Those with a metal piece, a plastic hook or a ribbon hook

- Those with a lining

- Those with an uneven surface, finished with titling or emboss

- Lined envelopes and other items that use adhesives or other composites for sealing may have this substance melt because of heat from the fusing unit.

- Hand-made envelopes

- Those containing air inside

- Those with wrinkles, bending marks, cuts, or other damage.

- Envelopes whose surface has deteriorated or whose shape has been deformed due to long-term storage or moisture absorption cannot be used.

- Those with four or more layers of lamination cannot be fed.

- Those with a window

Fold the flap of the envelope and make a sharp crease at the fold.

A misfeed may occur if the flap is up.

• Envelopes with the corner gluing position on the back not aligned with the corner edge cannot be used as it may cause creasing.
• Print quality is not guaranteed in the area 10 mm (13/32") around the edges of the envelope.
• Print quality is not guaranteed on parts of envelopes where there is a large step-like change of thickness, such as on four-layer parts or parts less than three layers.
• In the case of landscape envelopes, make sure that flaps are not in the range where the bypass feed roller moves on.

• Press envelopes to bleed air inside, and press creases on all 4 sides well before setting. In addition, when envelopes are warped or bent, straighten them using hard objects such as pencil or ruler before setting.
• Align on a flat surface
• Some envelopes may not be usable due to the shape of the flap or the type of envelope.

Important points when using label sheets

• Some labels may have to be loaded into the bypass tray in the specified orientation. Follow such instructions. If a form is already printed on the labels, and the print images and the preprinted form do not line up, adjust the application or printer driver settings to rotate the print images.
• Do not use the following types of label sheets.
• Label sheets without an adhesive copy or label copy
• Label sheets with adhesive exposed
• Label sheets with a specified feeding direction that is not supported by the machine
• A label sheet that has already been fed or has some labels removed
• Label sheets consisting of multiple sheets
• Label sheets that do not support laser printing
• Label sheets that cannot withstand heat
• Label sheets that have perforations in the backing paper
• Label sheets with slits in the backing paper • Non-standard label sheets
• Label sheets with adhesive that has deteriorated due to prolonged storage or otherwise
• Label sheets with cutouts that expose the backing paper
• Curled or otherwise deformed label sheets
• Torn or creased label sheets
• Label sheets consisting of three sheets or more.

1

Open the bypass tray.

When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11"R or A4R, pull out the extension guide.

Pull the extension guide all the way out.

Do not place heavy objects on the bypass tray or press down on the tray.

2

Load the paper with the print side facing down.

Insert the paper along the bypass tray guides all the way into the bypass tray until it stops slowly. Inserting the paper with excessive force may cause the leading edge to fold back. Inserting the paper too loosely may cause skewed feeding or misfeeds.

The paper must not exceed the maximum number of sheets and must not be higher than the indicator line.

3

Set the bypass tray guides correctly to the width of the paper.

Adjust the bypass tray guides so that they slightly contact the loaded paper.

For "Letter Head" and "Pre-Printed", set the paper with the print side up. However, when [Disabling of Duplex] is enabled, set the print side in the same orientation as in the regular mode (facing down).

• Do not forcefully push in paper that you are loading. This may cause misfeeds.
• If the bypass tray guides are set wider than the paper, move the bypass tray guides in until they correctly fit the width of the paper. If the bypass guides are set too wide, the paper may skew or be creased.

•How to close the bypass tray

Remove any paper remaining in the bypass tray. When the extension guide is pulled, push the extension guide into the bypass tray and then close the bypass tray.

HOW TO PLACE THE LONG PAPER GUIDE

The steps for attaching the optional long paper feeding tray to the bypass tray are explained below.

1

Extend the auxiliary guide of the long paper feeding tray.

2

Pull out the extension guide of the bypass tray.

3

Attach the long paper feeding tray onto the extension guide of the bypass tray.

4

Replace the extension guide of the bypass tray.

HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL

SELECTING A PROCEDURE FOR PLACING THE ORIGINAL DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND STATUS OF THE ORIGINAL

Place the original in the automatic document feeder. Depending on the type and status of the original, use the document glass. Follow the instructions to select the method for placing the original. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

DETECTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES

In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Condition Settings] → [Original Size Detector Setting].

One of the 8 groups of standard original sizes shown below can be selected for detection by the original size detection function.

Selections	Detectable original sizes
	Document glass Document feeder tray (automatic document feeder)
AB-1 A3, A4,	A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R A3, A4, A4R, A5, A5R, A6R	*, B4, B5, B5R, 11" x 17",8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11"
AB-2	A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2"x 13")	A3, A4, A4R, A5, A5R, A6R*, B4, B5, B5R, 11" x 17",8-1/2" x 11", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")
AB-3	A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR	A3, A4, A4R, A5, A5R, A6R*, B4, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x11", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13"), 8K, 16K, 16KR
AB-4	216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5"), A3, A4, A4R, A5,B5, B5R	A3, A4, A4R, A5, A5R, A6R*, B4, B5, B5R, 11" x 17",8-1/2" x 11", 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5")
AB-5	216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2"), A3, A4, A4R, A5,B5, B5R	A3, A4, A4R, A5, A5R, A6R*, B4, B5, B5R, 11" x 17",8-1/2" x 11", 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2")
Inch-1	11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,5-1/2" x 8-1/2"	11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,5-1/2" x 8-1/2", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, A3, A4
Inch-2 11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13"), 8-1/2" x11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"	11"x17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2"x13"), 8-1/2"x11",8-1/2"x11"R, 5-1/2"x8-1/2", 5-1/2"x8-1/2"R, A3, A4
Inch-3 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm), 8-1/2"x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"	11"x17", 8-1/2"x13-2/5 (216 mm x 340 mm),8-1/2"x11", 8-1/2"x11"R, 5-1/2"x8-1/2", A3, A4

* Can be used with BP-70M31/BP-70M36/BP-70M45/BP-70M55/BP-70M65.

Original Feeding Mode

The following original feeding modes can be set to operate by default in copy, image send, and scan to local drive.

When a mode is frequently used, this saves you from having to select the mode in another mode each time you need to use it.

In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Condition Settings] → [Original Feeding Mode].

• Mixed Size Doc. Different Width
• Slow Scan Mode
• Blank Page Skip*

* Excluding fax mode and Internet fax mode.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER

This section explains how to place originals in the automatic document feeder.

• Place originals of different sizes together, if needed, in the automatic document feeder. In that case, use the "Others" function in each mode to set [Mixed Size Original]. • See the following pages for the combinations of document sizes that can be loaded.

Copy: SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES (MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL) (page 3-91)

Fax/Scanner: SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES (MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL) (page 6-99)

• Before inserting originals into the document feeder tray, be sure to remove any staples or paper clips.
• If originals have damp spots due to correction fluid, ink or paste up glue, wait until the originals are dry before making copies. Otherwise the interior of the machine or the document glass may be soiled.
• Do not use the following originals. Incorrect original size detection, original misfeeds, and smudges may result. Transparency film or other transparent material for backup copy, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper or originals printed with thermal transfer ink ribbon should not be fed through the document feeder. Originals to be fed through the feeder should not be damaged, crumpled, folded, loosely pasted together, or have cut-out holes. Originals with multiple punched holes other than two-hole or three-hole punched paper may not feed correctly.
• Business cards may not be scanned correctly depending on the condition, material, shape and processing method used. (Business cards can be set in the automatic document feeder of the BP-70M31/BP-70M36/BP-70M45/BP-70M55/BP-70M65.)
• When using originals with two or three holes, place them so that the punched edge is positioned away from the feed slot of the document feeder tray. Specify the orientation of the original using [Original].

- Depending on the condition of the original, the type of paper, and the temperature and humidity of the environment in which the machine is used, multiple sheets of paper may be fed at the same time and may not be scanned correctly, or the ejected originals may not be neatly aligned.

It may be improved by the following settings.

- For copying: Set the resolution to 600x600dpi

- For scan transmission: use "Preview"

- When the document rolls in the original exit tray on the automatic document feeder, fix the paper fixing arm at the centre to the top.

Allowed original sizes

Minimum original size Maximum original size

Standard size(Minimum size that can be automatically detected)A6R: 105 mm (longitudinal) × 148 mm (transversal)*15-1/2" (longitudinal) × 8-1/2" (transversal)*1A5: 148 mm (longitudinal) × 210 mm (transversal)*25-1/2" (longitudinal) × 8-1/2" (transversal)*2Non-standard size(Minimum size that can be specified manually)51 mm (longitudinal) × 128 mm (transversal)*12-1/64" (longitudinal) × 5-3/64" (transversal)*1Business card: 51 mm (longitudinal) × 89 mm (transversal)*1131 mm (longitudinal) × 140 mm (transversal)*25-1/8" (longitudinal) × 5-1/2" (transversal)*2

Standard size(Maximum size that can be automatically detected)A3: 297 mm (longitudinal) × 420 mm (transversal)11" (longitudinal) × 17" (transversal)A3W (12" × 18") cannot be used.Non-standard size(Maximum size that can be specified manually)Copy mode:297 mm (longitudinal) × 432 mm (transversal)11-5/8" (longitudinal) × 17" (transversal)Fax/image send mode:297 mm (longitudinal) × 1000 mm (transversal)11" (longitudinal) × 39-3/8" (transversal)

*1 This can be set in BP-70M31/BP-70M36/BP-70M45/BP-70M55/BP-70M65.

*2 This can be set in BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65.

- When the original is a non-standard size, see the appropriate explanation below for the mode you are using.

• COPIER: "STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES (page 3-28)"

- FAX: "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES (page 5-47)"

- IMAGE SEND: "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES (page 6-72)"

- In fax or Imaging send mode, to load a 1000 mm (39-3/8") long original, you need to set the scan size to [Long Size]. In fax mode, see "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE (page 5-45)" and "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES (page 5-47)", and in image sending mode, see "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE (page 6-70)" and "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES (page 6-72)".

Allowed original weights

BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65	1-sided scanning: 35 to 128 g/m 2 (9 to 32 lbs Bond)2-sided scanning: 50 to 105 g/m 2 (13 to 28 lbs Bond)
BP-70M31/BP-70M36/BP-70M45/BP-70M55/BP-70M65	1-sided scanning: 35 to 220 g/m 2 (9 to 80 lbs Cover))2-sided scanning: 50 to 220 g/m 2 (13 to 80 lbs Cover))Business card: Thickness, 0.1mm to 0.2mm

To scan originals from 35 to 49 g/m² (9 to 13 lb Bond), use "Slow Scan Mode" in the "Others" function. Scanning without using "Slow Scan Mode" may result in original misfeeds.

When "Slow Scan Mode" is selected, automatic 2-sided scanning is not possible.

On the BP-70M31/BP-70M36/BP-70M45/BP-70M55/BP-70M65, to scan originals 158 to 220 g/m² (32 lb Bond to 80 lb Cover), use "Heavy Paper Scan" in the "Others" function.

Scanning without using "Heavy Paper Scan" may result in original misfeeds.

1

Make sure that there is no original on the document glass.

2

Place the original.

BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/

BP-50M65:

Up to 100 sheets can be inserted.

BP-70M31/BP-70M36/BP-70M45/BP-70M55/

BP-70M65:

Up to 300 sheets can be inserted.

After scanning is finished on the automatic document feeder, remove originals from the original exit tray.

PREVENTIVE LIGHT TO INDICATE ORIGINAL LEFT BEHIND

In order to prevent originals being left behind, the automatic document feeder (BP-70M31/BP-70M36/

BP-70M45/BP-70M55/BP-70M65) incorporates a lamp on the top of the original exit tray.

This lamp detects a document on the automatic document feeder, and starts blinking after the last original is output from the original exit tray.

Light turning off

The preventive light to indicate original left behind will turn off in the event of the following.

• When the scanned original is removed • After the preventive light to indicate original left behind blinks three times, repeated three times
• When a new original is placed in the automatic document feeder, and a job started
• When the machine enters sleep mode
• When use of the automatic document feeder is prohibited

• When the preventive light to indicate original left behind is blinking, placing the original on the document glass will not turn off the preventive light to indicate original left behind.
• The preventive light to indicate original left behind will not turn off by only placing an original on the automatic document feeder.
• The preventive light to indicate original left behind will not turn off even if the operation panel is off.
• If the preventive light to indicate original left behind turns off, this will not flash even if an original is left on the automatic document feeder.

ORIGINAL SETTING INDICATOR

On the BP-70M31/BP-70M36/BP-70M45/BP-70M55/BP-70M65, the original setting indicator lights when the document is correctly loaded on the document feeder tray.

If the original setting indicator is lit, it is possible for a user who has difficulty in confirming that a document is loaded on the document feeder tray to confirm that the document is loaded.

SKEW FEED PREVENTION

BP-70M31, BP-70M36, BP-70M45, BP-70M55 or BP-70M65 is equipped with a skewed feed prevention function. When a document is loaded at an angle, the function stops loading the document as misfeed.

DOUBLE FEED DETECTION

When you attach the double feed detection kit of the peripheral device to the automatic document feeder of the BP-70M31/BP-70M36/BP-70M45/BP-70M55/BP-70M65, you can use the double feed detection function.

This automatic document feeder is equipped with a double feed detection function.

If you attempt to scan multiple originals at the same time, scanning stops as a document jam.

DOCUMENT GLASS

This section describes the steps for setting the original on the document glass.

• Close the automatic document feeder slowly. Abruptly closing the automatic document feeder may damage it. • Take care that your fingers are not pinched when closing the automatic document feeder.

Allowed original sizes

Minimum original size Maximum original size
Standard size(Minimum size that can be automatically detected)A5: 210 mm (longitudinal) × 148 mm (transversal)8-1/2" (longitudinal) × 5-1/2" (transversal)Non-standard size(Minimum size that can be specified manually)25 mm (longitudinal) x 25 mm (transversal)1" (longitudinal) x 1" (transversal)	Standard size(Maximum size that can be automatically detected)A3: 297 mm (longitudinal) x 420 mm (transversal)11" (longitudinal) x 17" (transversal)Non-standard size(Maximum size that can be specified manually)297 mm (longitudinal) x 432 mm (transversal)11-5/8" (longitudinal) x 17" (transversal)

- When the original is a non-standard size, see the appropriate explanation below for the mode you are using.

• COPIER: "STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES (page 3-28)" • FAX: "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES (page 5-47)" • IMAGE SEND: "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES (page 6-72)"

1

Open the automatic document feeder.

2

Load the paper with the print side facing down.

Place the original face down and align the top left corner of the original with the back left corner (at the tip of the mark ▲) on the document glass.

Do not place any objects under the original size detector.

Closing the automatic document feeder with an object underneath may damage the original size detector or disable correct detection of the original size.

3

Close the automatic document feeder.

After placing the original, close the automatic document feeder. If the unit is left open, parts outside of the original will be copied in black, causing excessive use of toner.

• When closing, open the automatic document feeder all the way and then close it.
• If originals have damp spots due to correction fluid, ink, or paste-up glue, wait until the originals are dry before making copies. Otherwise, the interior of the machine or the document glass may be soiled.

PERIPHERAL DEVICES

PERIPHERAL DEVICES

Peripheral devices can be installed on the machine to increase its range of functionality.

The peripheral devices are generally optional. However, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment.

(As of January, 2022)

Product name Product	number	Description
Stand/550 sheet paper drawer	BP-DE12	TRAY 1 - 4 (when a stand/550/2x550/3x550/ 550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed) (page 1-15)
Stand/2x550 sheet paper drawer BP-DE13
Stand/3x550 sheet paper drawer BP-DE14
Stand/550&2100 sheet paper drawer	BP-DE15	TRAY 3 - 4 (when a stand/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed) (page 1-18)
Large capacity tray	BP-LC10	LOADING PAPER IN THE LARGE-CAPACITY TRAY (when a large capacity tray is installed) (page 1-20)
Long paper feeding tray	MX-LT10	HOW TO PLACE THE LONG PAPER GUIDE (page 1-27)
Exit tray unit	BP-TR12	When a finisher is installed, this can be added to the right side ofthe machine.
Exit tray cabinet*1	BP-TU10	This enables separation of output locations by mode (copy, printer, etc.).
Job separator tray MX-TR20
Folding unit	BP-FD10	FOLDING UNIT (page 1-66)
Inner finisher BP-FN11	BP-FN12	INNER FINISHER (page 1-39)
Finisher	BP-FN13	FINISHER (page 1-43)
Finisher (large stacker)	BP-FN15	FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) (page 1-46)
Saddle stitch finisher	BP-FN14	SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (page 1-50)
Saddle stitch finisher (large stacker)	BP-FN16	SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) (page 1-54)
Paper pass unit	BP-RB10	This unit is required to install a finisher or a saddle stitch finisher.
Punch module	MX-PN14AMX-PN14BMX-PN14CMX-PN14D	This unit punches holes in copies and other output. An inner finisher (BP-FN11/BP-FN12) is required.
	MX-PN15AMX-PN15BMX-PN15CMX-PN15D	This unit punches holes in copies and other output. A finisher or saddle stitch finisher (BP-FN13/BP-FN14) is required.
	MX-PN16AMX-PN16BMX-PN16CMX-PN16D	This unit punches holes in copies and other output. A finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) (BP-FN15/BP-FN16) is required.
Product name	Product number	Description
PS3 expansion kit*2	MX-PK13 Enables	the machine to be used as a Postscript printer.
Barcode font kit MX-PF10 Adds barcode	fonts to the machine.
Facsimile expansion kit BP-FX11 Enables	Fax.
Internet fax expansion kit MX-FWX1 Enables	Internet Fax.
Double feed detection kit	BP-DD10	If you attempt to scan multiple originals at the same time, scanning stops as a document jam.
Direct print expansion kit*2	MX-PU10 This enables direct printing of DOCX, XLSX, and PPTX files without going through a computer.
Application integration module	MX-AMX1	PREPARATIONS FOR METADATA DELIVERY (page 6-177)
Application communication module*2	BP-AM10 Sharp OSA (page 8-42)
External account module*2	BP-AM11
Stamp unit	AR-SU1	This stamps each original page after it is scanned in image send mode. An automatic document feeder is required.
The stamp cartridge	AR-SV1	Two stamp cartridges are included in a package.
Enhanced compression kit*2	MX-EB19 Saves a scanned document in the Compact PDF format. Compact PDF results in a smaller size than regular PDF.
OCR expansion kit*2	MX-EB20 This is required to use the OCR function.
Wireless connection adaptor	BP-EB10	Adds the wireless LAN or Bluetooth function to the machine.
High capacity SSD	BP-SD10	Extends the local drive capacity of the machine.
Utility table	MX-UT10	You can use this as a work platform, or temporarily place originals or a mobile device. A password can also be established.
Virus detection kit	BP-VD10	VIRUS SCAN (page 8-44)

*1 Depending on the country, region or model, it may be installed as standard or may be a peripheral device. Contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative. *2 These peripheral devices can be installed on the BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65. (These devices are equipped standard on the BP-70M31/BP-70M36/BP-70M45/BP-70M55/BP-70M65.)

Some options may not be available in some countries and regions.

INNER FINISHER

This device outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper. As needed, it staples each set. You can also perform stapling manually.

To punch holes in printed paper, install an optional hole punch module.

PART NAMES

The following describes the parts that appear when the finisher is open.

(1) Output tray

Stapled and offset output is delivered to this tray. The tray is slidable. To print on large paper such as A3 (11" x 17") size, extend the tray.

(2) Manual staple key

Press to execute manual stapling.

(3) Punch waste box (when a punch module is installed)

This stores punch waste discharged from punching.

(4) Insertion slot

Place the paper that you want to staple in this slot. Maximum thickness 4 mm.

(5) Front cover

Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed, replace staples, remove a staple jam, or remove the punch waste box.

(6) Staple case

This holds the staple cartridge. Pull the case out to replace the staple cartridge or remove a staple jam.

(7) Staple case release lever

Use this lever to remove the staple case.

(8) Lever

Use this lever to move the finisher in order to remove a paper misfeed, or remove a staple jam.

- The inner finisher cannot be installed at the same time as the folding unit, finisher, finisher (large stacker), saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker).

• Exercise caution when you turn on the power and when printing take place, as the output tray may move up and down.

HOW TO STAPLE MANUALLY

You can perform stapling manually.

Make sure the manual staple key is lit green.

Place the paper that you want to staple in the insertion slot.

When you place the paper, the manual staple key blinks green.

After two seconds elapse, stapling automatically starts.

• To staple earlier than the auto staple start time, press the manual staple key.

• Manual stapling cannot be executed during execution of a staple job.
• Manual stapling cannot be executed during auto power shutoff mode.

Relation between paper orientation and stapling result

Paper Paper orientation when inserted After stapling
AB

SUPPLIES

The finisher requires the following staple cartridge:

Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges)

MX-SCX1

INNER FINISHER MAINTENANCE

When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge.

Replacement the staple cartridge

1

Open the finisher front cover.

2

Lower the staple case release lever and remove the staple case.

Pull the staple case out to the right.

3

Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple case.

4

Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case as shown.

Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place.

5

Push the staple case.

Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.

6

Close the finisher front cover.

Make a proof copy in staple function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.

FINISHER

This device outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper. As needed, it staples each set. To punch holes in printed paper, install an optional hole punch module.

PART NAMES

(1) Output tray (upper tray)

The tray is slidable. To print on large paper such as A3 (11" x 17") paper, extend the tray.

(2) Output tray (lower tray)

Stapled and offset output is delivered to this tray. The tray is slidable. To print on large paper such as A3 (11" x 17") paper, extend the tray.

(3) Top cover

Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.

(4) Front cover

Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge, remove a staple jam or remove a paper misfeed.

• To install a finisher, a paper pass unit or folding unit and stand/550/2x550/3x550/550&2100 sheet paper drawer are required.
• A finisher cannot be installed simultaneously with an inner finisher, finisher (large stacker), saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker).
• Do not place heavy objects on the finisher or press down on the finisher. Exercise caution when you turn on the power and when printing takes place, as the tray may move up and down.

SUPPLIES

The finisher (large stacker) requires the following staple cartridge: Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SCX1

When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge.

Replacing the staple cartridge

1

Open the front cover.

2

Pull out the staple unit.

3

Remove the staple case.

4

Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple case.

5

Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case as shown.

Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place.

6

Push the staple case firmly back in.

Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.

7

Replace the staple unit.

8

Close the front cover.

FINISHER (LARGE STACKER)

This device outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper. As needed, it staples each set. You can also perform stapling manually. To punch holes in printed paper, install an optional hole punch module.

PART NAMES

(6)(5)

(1) Output tray (upper tray)

The tray is slidable. To print on large paper such as A3 (11" x 17") paper, extend the tray.

(2) Output tray (lower tray)

Stapled and offset output is delivered to this tray. The tray is slidable. To print on large paper such as A3 (11" x 17") paper, extend the tray.

(3) Manual staple key

Press to execute manual stapling.

(4) Top cover

Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.

(5) Insertion slot

Place the paper that you want to staple in this slot. Maximum thickness 9 mm.

(6) Front cover

Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge, remove a staple jam or remove a paper misfeed.

• To install a finisher (large stacker), a paper pass unit or folding unit and stand/550/2x550/3x550/550&2100 sheet paper drawer are required.
• A finisher (large stacker) cannot be installed simultaneously with an inner finisher, finisher, saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker).
• Do not place heavy objects on the finisher (large stacker) or press down on the finisher (large stacker). Exercise caution when you turn on the power and when printing takes place, as the tray may move up and down.

HOW TO STAPLE MANUALLY

You can perform stapling manually.

Make sure the manual staple key is lit green.

1

Place the paper that you want to staple in the insertion slot.

When you place the paper, the manual staple key blinks green.

After two seconds elapse, stapling automatically starts.

• To staple earlier than the auto staple start time, press the manual staple key.

• Manual stapling cannot be executed during execution of a staple job.
• Manual stapling cannot be executed during auto power shutoff mode.

Relation between paper orientation and stapling result

Paper Paper orientation when inserted After stapling
AB

SUPPLIES

The finisher (large stacker) requires the following staple cartridge: Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SC11

FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) MAINTENANCE

When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge.

Replacement the staple cartridge

1

Open the front cover.

2

Remove the staple case.

3

Remove the empty staple cartridge.

4

Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case.

Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place.

5

Push the staple case firmly back in.

Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.

6

Close the front cover.

Make a proof copy in staple function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

This includes the offset function that outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper, the staple sort function that staples each set of prints, the saddle stitch function that automatically staples the centre of the sheets and folds the sheets in half, and the paper folding function that folds paper in half.

To punch holes in printed paper, install an optional hole punch module.

PART NAMES

(1) Output tray (upper tray)

The tray is slidable. To print on large paper such as A3 (11" x 17") paper, extend the tray.

(2) Output tray (lower tray)

Stapled and offset output is delivered to this tray. The tray is slidable. To print on large paper such as A3 (11" x 17") paper, extend the tray.

(3) Top cover

Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.

(4) Saddle stitch tray

Saddle-stitched output is delivered to this tray.

(5) Front cover

Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge, remove a staple jam, or remove a paper misfeed.

• To install a saddle stitch finisher, a paper pass unit or folding unit and stand/550/2x550/3x550/550&2100 sheet paper drawer are required.
• Do not place heavy objects on the saddle finisher or press down on the saddle stitch finisher. Exercise caution when you turn on the power and when printing takes place, as the tray may move up and down.
• A saddle stitch finisher cannot be installed simultaneously with an inner finisher, finisher, finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker).

SUPPLIES

The saddle stitch finisher requires the following staple cartridge: Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) AR-SC2

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER MAINTENANCE

When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge.

1

Open the front cover.

2

Pull the lever and withdraw the staple unit.

Pull it slowly out until it stops.

3

Lower the staple case release lever and remove the staple case.

4

Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple case.

5

Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case as shown.

Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place. After inserting the staple cartridge, pull the seal that holds the staples straight out.

Do not remove the seal from the cartridge before inserting the cartridge into the case.

6

Attach the staple case.

Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.

7

Push the staple unit back in.

8

Close the front cover.

Make a proof copy in staple function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (LARGE STACKER)

This includes the offset function that outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper, the staple sort function that staples each set of prints, the saddle stitch function that automatically staples the centre of the sheets and folds the sheets in half, and the paper folding function that folds paper in half. You can also perform stapling manually. To punch holes in printed paper, install an optional hole punch module.

PART NAMES

(1) Output tray (upper tray)

The tray is slidable. To print on large paper such as A3 (11" x 17") paper, extend the tray.

(2) Output tray (lower tray)

Stapled and offset output is delivered to this tray. The tray is slidable. To print on large paper such as A3 (11" x 17") paper, extend the tray.

(3) Manual staple key

Press to execute manual stapling.

(4) Top cover

Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.

(5) Insertion slot

Place the paper that you want to staple in this slot. Maximum thickness 9 mm.

(6) Saddle stitch tray

Saddle-stitched output is delivered to this tray.

(7) Front lower cover

Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge, remove a staple jam, or remove a paper misfeed.

(8) Front upper cover

Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge, remove a staple jam, or remove a paper misfeed.

- To install a saddle stitch finisher (large stacker), a paper pass unit or folding unit and stand/550/2x550/3x550/550&2100 sheet paper drawer are required.

- Do not place heavy objects on the saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) or press down on the saddle stitch finisher (large stacker).

• Exercise caution when you turn on the power and when printing takes place, as the tray may move up and down.

- A saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) cannot be installed simultaneously with an inner finisher, finisher, finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher.

HOW TO STAPLE MANUALLY

You can perform stapling manually.

Make sure the manual staple key is lit green.

1

Place the paper that you want to staple in the insertion slot.

When you place the paper, the manual staple key blinks green.

After two seconds elapse, stapling automatically starts.

- To staple earlier than the auto staple start time, press the manual staple key.

• Manual stapling cannot be executed during execution of a staple job.
• Manual stapling cannot be executed during auto power shutoff mode.

Relation between paper orientation and stapling result

Paper Paper orientation when inserted After stapling
AB

SUPPLIES

The saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) requires the following staple cartridge:

Finisher unit

Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SC11

Saddle stitch unit

Staple cartridge (approx. 2000 staples per cartridge x four cartridges) MX-SC12

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) MAINTENANCE

When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge. Replacement the staple cartridge (finisher unit)

Replacement the staple cartridge (finisher unit)

1

Open the front upper cover.

2

Remove the staple case.

3

Remove the empty staple cartridge.

4

Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case.

Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place.

5

Push the staple case firmly back in.

Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.

6

Close the front upper cover.

Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.

Replacement the staple cartridge (saddle stitch unit)

Before starting this procedure, remove all output from the output tray of the saddle finisher (large stacker). Do not replace removed output back in the output tray.

1

Open the front upper cover.

2

Slowly pull out the front lower cover until it stops.

3

Remove the staple case.

4

Remove the empty staple cartridge.

5

Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case.

Replace both staple cartridges.

6

Push the staple case firmly back in.

Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.

7

Push the front lower cover back in.

8

Close the front upper cover.

When the staple cartridge has been replaced, the staple is automatically tested.

Make a test print or copy using the saddle stitch function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.

PUNCH MODULE

The punch module can be installed on an inner finisher, finisher, or saddle stitch finisher to punch holes in paper to be output.

DISCARDING PUNCH WASTE

Punch waste from punched holes is collected in the punch waste box. Follow the operation procedure to replace punch waste.

Inner finisher installed

1

Open the finisher front cover.

2

While pressing the lever over to the left, slide the finisher to the left until it stops.

3

Grasp the punch waste box handle, gently pull out the box, and discard the punch waste.

4

Replace the punch waste box.

If the punch waste box is not replaced properly, printing will not be possible to use the punch function.

5

Slide the finisher to the right until it stops.

6

Close the finisher front cover.

Finisher installed

1

Open the front cover.

2

Pull out the punch waste box and discard the punch waste.

3

Replace the punch waste box.

If the punch waste box is not replaced properly, printing will not be possible to use the punch function.

4

Close the front cover.

Finisher (large stacker) installed

1

Open the front cover.

2

Pull out the punch waste box and discard the punch waste.

3

Replace the punch waste box.

If the punch waste box is not replaced properly, printing will not be possible to use the punch function.

4

Close the front cover.

Saddle stitch finisher installed

1

Open the front cover.

2

Pull out the punch waste box and discard the punch waste.

3

Replace the punch waste box.

If the punch waste box is not replaced properly, printing will not be possible to use the punch function.

4

Close the front cover.

Saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) installed

1

Open the front cover.

2

Pull out the punch waste box and discard the punch waste.

3

Replace the punch waste box.

If the punch waste box is not replaced properly, printing will not be possible to use the punch function.

4

Close the front cover.

FOLDING UNIT

A folding unit can be used for Z-Fold, C-Fold, Accordion Fold and Half Fold.

PART NAMES

(1) Front cover

Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed. The tray is slidable. To print on large paper such as 11" x 17" (A3) paper, extend the tray.

(2) Output tray of folding unit

Folded output is delivered to this tray.

MAINTENANCE

REGULAR MAINTENANCE

To ensure that the machine continues to provide top quality performance, periodically clean the machine.

Do not use a flammable spray to clean the machine. If gas from the spray comes in contact with hot electrical components or the fusing unit inside the machine, fire or electrical shock may result.

• Do not use thinner, benzene, or similar volatile cleaning agents to clean the machine. These may degrade or discolour the housing.
• Use a soft cloth to gently wipe off dirt from the area on the operation panel with a mirror-like finish (shown at right). If you use a stiff cloth or rub hard, the surface may be damaged.

CLEANING THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER

If the document glass or document backplate sheet becomes dirty, the dirt will appear as dirty spots, black lines, or white lines in the scanned image. Keep these parts clean at all times.

Wipe the parts with a clean, soft cloth.

If necessary, moisten the cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent. After that, wipe with a clean dry cloth.

Examples of lines in the image

Document glass

Document backplate sheet

SCANNING AREA

If black lines or white lines appear in images scanned using the automatic document feeder, clean the scanning area (the thin long glass next to the document glass).

To clean this part, use the glass cleaner that is stored in the automatic document feeder. After using the glass cleaner, be sure to return it to its storage position.

When using the BP-70M31 / BP-70M36 / BP-70M45 / BP-70M55 / BP-70M65

1

Open the automatic document feeder and remove the glass cleaner.

2

Clean the document scanning area on the document glass with the glass cleaner.

One scanning area is on the document glass and the other is inside the automatic document feeder.

3

Open the scanning area cover on the automatic document feeder.

Push in the release switch to release the cover.

4

Clean the scanning area in the automatic document feeder.

5

Close the cover.

6

Replace the glass cleaner.

When using the BP-50M26 / BP-50M31 / BP-50M36 / BP-50M45 / BP-50M55 / BP-50M65

1

Open the automatic document feeder and remove the glass cleaner.

2

Clean the document scanning area on the document glass with the glass cleaner.

3

Replace the glass cleaner.

CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER

If paper misfeeds frequently occur when feeding envelopes or heavy paper through the bypass tray, wipe the surface of the feed roller with a clean soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent.

When using the automatic document feeder, if the placed original is smudged or jammed, wipe the surface of the paper feed roller in the direction of the arrow with a clean, soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent.

BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65

Be careful not to bend or detach the plastic sheet.

BP-70M31/BP-70M36/BP-70M45/BP-70M55/BP-70M65

Be careful not to bend or detach the plastic sheet.

REPLACEMENT OF TONER CARTRIDGE

Replace the toner cartridge. When this message appears, prepare a toner cartridge for replacement. Always replace the toner cartridge after the "Change the toner cartridge." message appears. You should keep one set of replacement toner cartridges on hand so that you can replace a toner cartridge immediately when toner runs out.

REPLACEMENT MESSAGE

Toner Low. (Do not replace cartridge until requested.)

When this message appears, prepare a toner cartridge for replacement.

If you continue printing, the following message appears.

When this message appears, prepare a toner cartridge for replacement and replace it.

In this state, printing is possible.

However, this message does not appear during printing.

Ready to scan for copy. (Change the toner cartridge.)

If you continue to use the machine, the following message will appear when the toner runs out.

Once the machine enters this state, printing can not be carried out until the toner cartridge is replaced.

1

Open the front cover.

Hold both sides and close.

2

Pull the toner cartridge toward you.

Gently pull out the toner cartridge horizontally. If the cartridge is pulled out abruptly, toner may spill out. Hold the toner cartridge with both hands as shown and slowly pull it out of the machine.

3

Take out a new toner cartridge from its package and shake it five or six times.

4

Slowly insert the new toner cartridge on the level.

5

Press in firmly until you hear a "click" sound

6

Close the front cover.

After the toner cartridge is replaced, the machine automatically enters image adjustment mode. Do not open the front cover while this is occurring. Hold both sides and close.

• Do not throw a toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.
• Store toner cartridges out of reach of small children.
• If a toner cartridge is stored upright, the toner may harden and become unusable. Always store toner cartridges on their side.
• If a toner cartridge other than a SHARP-recommended toner cartridge is used, the machine may not attain full quality and performance and there is a risk of damage to the machine. Be sure to use a SHARP-recommended toner cartridge.

• Depending on your conditions of use, the colour may become light or the image blurred.
• Your service technician will collect used toner cartridges. Your service technician will collect them.
• To view the approximate amount of toner remaining (indicated in %), hold down the [Home Screen] key during printing or in standby mode. When the percentage falls to "25-0%", keep a toner cartridge for replacement purposes before toner runs out.
• When toner runs out while the home screen is displayed, the "Toner Empty" message appears in the upper right corner of the screen.

REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION CONTAINER

The toner collection container collects excess toner that is produced during printing. When the toner collection container becomes full, the message "Replace toner collection container." will appear.

Replace the toner collection container as instructed by the message in the touch panel.

When the key is tapped, instructions for replacing the toner collection container will appear. Follow the instructions.

When the toner collection container is replaced, the message will automatically disappear.

• Do not throw the toner collection container into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.
• Store the toner collection container out of the reach of small children.

Do not touch the internal cords or connectors.

1

Open the front cover.

Open while pressing the convex parts on both sides.

2

Remove the toner collection container.

Press the release buttons on the sides of the toner collection container, push the toner collection container down until it stops, and pull it out slowly.

3

Place the toner collection container on a flat surface.

Place a sheet of paper such as newspaper on the surface before placing the toner collection container.

• Keep the toner collection container in an upright position without collapsing it.
• Do not throw away the removed toner collection container; instead, place it in the plastic bag provided and keep it in the box in which it was packed.
• Keep the toner collection container you have removed in a plastic bag (do not discard them).
• Your service technician will collect them.

4

Install a new toner collection container.

Press both sides of the toner collection container with your hands until the left and right locks fully engage.

5

Close the front cover.

Hold both sides and close.

REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE

If a stamp unit (AR-SU1) is installed on the automatic document feeder and the stamp has become light, replace the stamp cartridge (AR-SV1).

Supplies

Stamp cartridge (2 in package) AR-SV1

WHEN USING THE BP-70M31 / BP-70M36 / BP-70M45 / BP-70M55 / BP-70M65

1

Open the automatic document feeder.

2

Remove the document backplate sheet from the automatic document feeder.

Remove the sheet slowly. Place the removed sheet with the side that was attached face up on the document glass.

3

Grasp the tab on the stamp unit and pull the unit out.

4

Remove the stamp cartridge (A).

5

Install a new stamp cartridge.

6

Push the stamp unit back in.

Push the stamp unit in until it clicks into place.

7

Close the automatic document feeder to attach the document backplate sheet.

When the automatic document feeder is closed, the document backplate sheet on the document glass attaches to the automatic document feeder.

8

Make sure that the document backplate sheet is firmly attached to the automatic document feeder and then close the automatic document feeder.

If the document backplate sheet is not firmly attached, remove the sheet and then close the automatic document feeder again to firmly attach the sheet.

WHEN USING THE BP-50M26 / BP-50M31 / BP-50M36 / BP-50M45 / BP-50M55 / BP-50M65

1

Open the document feeder tray.

2

Remove the stamp cartridge while pushing it downwards.

3

Install a new stamp cartridge.

4

Close the document feeder tray.

TOUCH PANEL

TOUCH TYPES 2-2

OPERATION TYPES 2-2

OPERATION OF FREQUENTLY USED KEYS ..... 2-5

ACTION PANEL 2-6

SYSTEM INFORMATION SCREEN 2-6

HOME SCREEN AND PREVIEW SCREEN

HOME SCREEN 2-7

OVERVIEW 2-7

ICON INDICATING THE STATUS OF THE MACHINE....2-9

PREVIEW SCREEN. 2-11

CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL

EDITING THE HOME SCREEN 2-18

ADDING SHORTCUT KEYS 2-18

EDITING SHORTCUT KEYS 2-21

CHANGING A SHORTCUT KEY 2-24

ADDING A SHORTCUT KEY IMAGE 2-27

MOVING A SHORTCUT KEY 2-29

RETURNING THE SHORTCUT KEYS TO THE

RETURNING THE SHORTCUT KEYS TO THE

FACTORY DEFAULT STATE 2-31

CHANGING THE TRANSPARENCY OF A SHORTCUT

KEY 2-34

CHANGING THE LAYOUT PATTERN OF THE HOME

SCREEN 2-36

SELECTING A MFP DISPLAY PATTERN FOR THE

HOME SCREEN....2-38

CHANGING THE COLOUR OF TEXT ON THE HOME

SCREEN 2-40

CHANGING THE BACKGROUND IMAGE OF THE

HOME SCREEN....2-42

CHANGING THE FIXED KEYS 2-45

INCREASING THE TEXT SIZE 2-47

CHANGING THE LANGUAGE USED ON THE

MACHINE....2-48

CHANGING THE POSITION OF THE [Home Screen]

KEY 2-51

JOB STATUS

STOPPING/DELETING A JOB, PRIORITY

PROCESSING AND CHECKING THE STATUS .....2-53

TYPES OF JOB STATUS SCREENS.....2-53

STOPPING/DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR

RESERVED....2-55

PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB . . . .2-56

CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN

PROGRESS....2-58

CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS .....2-59

READING THE JOB LIST 2-60

CHARACTER ENTRY

CHARACTER ENTRY .....2-63

NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFT KEYBOARD KEYS. 2-63

SET THE KEYBOARD SETTING .....2-64

TOUCH PANEL

TOUCH TYPES

OPERATION TYPES

In addition to tapping, equivalent to conventional touching, the touch panel of the machine can be operated by long touching, flicking and sliding.

Tapping

Touch the panel with your finger and then lift it quickly. Use this method to select a key, tab or check box.

Long touching

Touch the panel with your finger and hold it for a while. Keep holding (long touching) it on the action panel or characters in the text box to display characters in a balloon.

Flicking

Flick the panel to scroll a preview image quickly.

Dragging

Drag (slide your finger touching the panel in a random direction) to replace a page in the original during preview.

Sliding

Slide the scroll bar (with your finger touching the panel) to scroll up and down a list with a large number of items.

Double tapping

Touch the screen twice. Use this operation to enlarge the image in the preview.

Pinch

Touch the screen with two fingers and move them toward each other. This is used to reduce the browser and preview display.

Spread

Touch the screen with two fingers and move them away from each other. This is used to enlarge the browser and preview display.

Operation on respective screens

Key (tapping)

A. Tap to select an item. The selected key turns into a different colour. B. Tap numeric keys to enter numbers. C. Tap to increase or decrease the value. Long touching causes the value to be increased or decreased until you stop touching. D. Tap to enter a checkmark and enable the setting. E. Tap here to close the screen

List (tapping, sliding and flicking)

A. Tap to select an item. The selected item turns into a different colour. B. Slide the bar up and down. It appears when the item does not fit in the screen. C. Flick the key upwards or downwards. The item scrolls up or down.

Slider (sliding)

A. Slide the knob from side to side.

Tab (tapping)

A. Tap a tab to switch what is displayed.

Preview screen (Double tapping/ Pinch/ Spread)

A. When a preview screen is "pinched", the screen image is reduced. When "spread", the image is enlarged. When "Double tapping", the image is also enlarged.

OPERATION OF FREQUENTLY USED KEYS

Numeric keys

Tap a number to enter it.

To clear the entered number, tap the [C] key.

On the address screen, you can enter characters other than numbers, and a different key layout is provided. You can also move the cursor by using the [←] and [→] keys. Tap the [C] key to delete one character to the left of the cursor.

[Start] key

Tap to perform a print or send job.

In easy scan mode, [B/W Start] and [Colour Start] keys are displayed.

[Cancel Copy] key, [Storing Cancelled] key, [Cancel Scan] key, [Sending Cancelled] key

Tap to stop copying, printing, or transmission.

[CA] key

Tap to cancel all settings and restore the initial status in each mode.

ACTION PANEL

Recommended functions are displayed on the action panel when you configure functions in each mode.

From the action panel, you can configure functions or combine the configured function with a function displayed on the action panel.

If the action panel does not appear, tap the action panel tab.

The functions displayed on the action panel vary depending on the mode or the functions that have been configured.

If too many functions have been configured to be displayed on the action panel, you can slide the panel vertically or tap and to view all.

In enlarge display mode, part of the text on the action panel may not be displayed. To display the whole text, long-touch the partially hidden key or slide the tab of the action panel to the left.

Tap the [System Info.] key in the System Information area at the top of the touch screen to display the System Information screen.

In addition, in case that an error has occurred to this machine, this screen is displayed automatically to show the details of an error.

(1) Notification

If there is an error which requires an user operation to recover, such as toner outage or transmission error, an instruction is displayed here.

If → is displayed on the right side of the Notification list, tap → to jump to the setting screen where the error originated in.

Notifications disappear from the list when problems are resolved.

(2) Machine Information

The connection information of the machine is displayed.

(3) Paper Tray

Size, type, and remaining amount of paper inside the machine are displayed. Tap here to jump to the Paper Tray Settings screen.

HOME SCREEN AND PREVIEW SCREEN

HOME SCREEN

Tapping the [Home Screen] key displays the home screen on the touch panel. The home screen displays the keys for selecting modes or functions.

OVERVIEW

(1) System Information area

Tap this area to display the System Information screen.

▶ SYSTEM INFORMATION SCREEN(page 2-6)

(2) [Home Screen]

Switch to the home screen.

(3) Mode selection area

The mode selection screen is displayed.

(4) Shortcut keys

Select shortcut keys for modes or functions.

▶ SYSTEM INFORMATION SCREEN (page 2-6)

(5) Fixed display key

Use these keys to select functions that make the machine easier to use.

(6) [Job Status] key

Displays the job in progress or waiting with text or icon.

▶ SYSTEM INFORMATION SCREEN (page 2-6)

(7) Clock

Displays the time.

(8) Action panel

Select functions that can be utilized in respective modes.

Tap the tab, and the list of function keys is displayed.

▶ ACTION PANEL(page 2-6)

(9) Home screen page switching key

Switch the pages for displaying shortcut keys.

Recent jobs

Tap this key to display the contents of the most recently used jobs in a list.

Tap an item in the list to set the contents in the list.

ICON INDICATING THE STATUS OF THE MACHINE

Icon	Machine status	Icon	Machine status
	Printer data is being processed. A USB device is installed
	Printer data is being printed. The field support system is enabled.	[T350]
	Send data exists. Single-byte alphanumeric character entry	[AKZO]
	Forward error data exists. A data security kit is installed	[2XXA]
	Received data exists. Connecting to the access point (Level 4)
[4YW]	Received confidential fax data exists. Connecting to the access point (Level 3)
[Y807]	Received data is held. Connecting to the access point (Level 2)
[D7AS]	Received preview data exists. Connecting to the access point (Level 1)
[4AXX]	OSA communication is in progress. Not connected to the access point
[C40A]	Enlarge display mode is enabled. Bad connection of the wireless device in the machine*	[DX04]
	Eco mode is enabled. Waiting for the access point
[80HK]	A maintenance notification is issued. A LAN cable is not connected.	[HYST]
	Remote operation is in progress. Bluetooth connection in progress

* Contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.

CHANGING MODES

Changing mode from the Home screen Changing mode from the mode display

↓

↓

↓

For procedures for editing the home screen, see "EDITING THE HOME SCREEN (page 2-18)".

PREVIEW SCREEN

In the preview screen, you can view output images or images stored in the machine using the touch panel. [Easy mode] [Normal mode]

Keys used in the preview screen

	This changes the mode to edit mode.Pages of the original can be changed,rotated, or deleted.		This rotates the preview image of wholepage in the arrow's direction. Theprinting result is not rotated.
*	This reduces the image.		This displays preview images ofrespective pages.
*	This displays the scroll bar forenlargement/reduction operations.Moving the slider to the left reduces theimage, and moving the slider to the rightenlarges the image.		This displays thumbnails of previewimages.
*	This enlarges the image.		This displays pages in a 3D view.

* Can also be used in Easy mode.

• The display position of an image can be moved by dragging it while it is enlarged.
• To enlarge an image, double-tap it when the preview image is displayed by page.

Deleting a page

1

In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode.

2

Tap the page you want to delete, and tap 📄.

• You can also delete the page by tapping [Delete the Page] on the action panel.
• You can also delete the page by dragging a page to .

• To undo the deletion, tap ☐ To redo the deletion, tap .

Tap the [Edit End] key.

Moving a page

1

In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode.

2

Tap the page you want to move, and drag to move the page.

You can also move the page by tapping [Move the Page] on the action panel and then tapping the +/- of the destination.

3

Tap the [Edit End] key.

Rotating a page

1

In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode.

2

Tap the page you want to rotate, and drag or to rotate the page.

You can also rotate the page by tapping [Rotate 180 Degrees] (Copy mode only) or [Rotate 90 Degrees] (Fax and scanner mode only) on the action panel.

3

Tap the [Edit End] key.

Setting chapter inserts

When N-Up or 2-Sided is specified, you can move a page marked with to the first page.

1

In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode.

2

Tap the page you want to set chapter inserts.

3

Tap

is displayed on the page.

• You can also set chapter inserts by tapping [Specify Chapter Inserts] on the action panel. • To cancel the Chapter Inserts setting:

Tap displayed on the page, or select the page and tap [Cancel Chapter Inserts of Selected Page.] on the action panel.

4

Tap the [Edit End] key.

Inserting a blank page

1

In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode.

2

Tap and tap for the location into which you want to insert a blank page.

You can also insert a blank page by tapping [Insert Blank Page] on the action panel.

3

Tap the [Edit End] key.

Deleting part of the original image

1

In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode.

2

Tap [Erase Specified Range] on the action panel.

3

Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the erase range.

Specify the erase range and then tap the [OK] key.

To delete the image outside the selected range, tap [Reverse Erase Range] on the action panel.

4

On the action panel, select [Apply This Erase Position to All Pages.] or [Apply This Erase Position to This Page.].

5

As necessary, repeat the steps to specify the erase range and the pages to which it is applied.

6

Tap the [Exit] key.

Changing the settings

Tapping the tab on the left of the screen allows you to change the settings. You cannot tap the keys for functions whose settings cannot be changed.

CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL

EDITING THE HOME SCREEN

In the home screen, you can change the number of shortcut keys shown and change shortcut keys.

This includes changing the background and text colour, and changing the background to a custom image.

ADDING SHORTCUT KEYS

This section explains how to add a shortcut key to the home screen.

You can add a shortcut key using the touch panel, or from the Web page. In the Web page, you can change a shortcut key image to any custom image.

From the touch panel

1

Open the action panel on the home screen, and tap [Edit Home].

2

The administrator password screen appears. Enter your password.

Enter the administrator password.

3

Tap an empty shortcut key location.

4

Tap the function you want to add.

The shortcut key will be added to the selected location.

5

After completing the settings, tap the [Logout] key.

From the Web page

1

Enter the IP address set in the machine in the address bar of your web browser.

In the factory default state, you must enter your user password after entering the IP address.

2

On the Web page, click the [System Settings] tab → [Home Screen Settings].

Some settings may require that you enter your user password after clicking [Home Screen Settings]. If you did not perform user authentication, you must enter the administrator password.

3

Select the function you want to add.

To change the name of a shortcut key, select [Custom] in [Key Name] and enter the desired name in the text box.

To change the image of a shortcut key, go to the next step. If you are not changing the image, go to step 5.

4

To change the image of a shortcut key, set the [Use Custom Image] checkbox and select a previously added image with [Select File].

To save an image, see "ADDING A SHORTCUT KEY IMAGE (page 2-27).

5

When you have finished configuring the settings, click the [Submit] button.

The settings are saved in the machine and applied.

When you have finished settings, click the [Logout] button and close your Web browser.

EDITING SHORTCUT KEYS

You can add shortcut keys to the home screen, and delete unneeded shortcut keys.

You can also change the display order of the shortcut keys and change names and images to make the machine easier to use.

From the touch panel

1

Open the action panel on the home screen, and tap [Edit Home].

2

The administrator password screen appears. Enter your password.

Enter the administrator password.

3

Tap the shortcut key you want to delete, and tap [Delete Key].

A yellow frame appears around the selected shortcut key. With the shortcut key selected, tap

You can also delete by dragging the shortcut key to

4

Tap the [Yes] key.

The selected shortcut key will be deleted.

5

After completing the settings, tap the [Logout] key.

From the Web page

1

Enter the IP address set in the machine in the address bar of your web browser.

In the factory default state, you must enter your user password after entering the IP address.

2

On the Web page, click the [System Settings] tab → [Home Screen Settings].

Some settings may require that you enter your user password after clicking [Home Screen Settings]. If you did not perform user authentication, you must enter the administrator password.

3

Click [Condition Settings] and click the shortcut key you want to delete.

4

Select [None] and click the [Submit] button.

When you click the [Submit] button, the [Home Screen Registration] screen closes.

5

When you have finished configuring the settings, click the [Submit] button.

The settings are saved in the machine and applied.

When you have finished settings, click the [Logout] button and close your Web browser.

CHANGING A SHORTCUT KEY

This section explains how to change a shortcut key in the home screen.

Only the name can be changed from the touch panel. You can change the icon image from the Web page.

From the touch panel

To change a shortcut key from the touch panel, move the shortcut key in the desired location away from that location, and then register the new shortcut key in the location that has been freed. For information about how to move shortcut keys, see "MOVING A SHORTCUT KEY (page 2-29). For information about how to add shortcut keys, see "ADDING SHORTCUT KEYS (page 2-18).

This section explains how to change the name of a shortcut key.

1

Open the action panel on the home screen, and tap [Edit Home].

2

The administrator password screen appears. Enter your password.

Enter the administrator password.

3

A yellow frame appears around the selected shortcut key.

A yellow frame appears around the selected shortcut key.

4

Enter the new name by keyboard.

Enter the name, and tap the [OK] key.

5

After completing the settings, tap the [Logout] key.

From the Web page

1

Enter the IP address set in the machine in the address bar of your web browser.

In the factory default state, you must enter your user password after entering the IP address.

2

On the Web page, click the [System Settings] tab → [Home Screen Settings].

Some settings may require that you enter your user password after clicking [Home Screen Settings]. If you did not perform user authentication, you must enter the administrator password.

3

Click [Condition Settings], and click the shortcut key you want to change.

4

Select the desired function.

To change the name of a shortcut key, select [Custom] in [Key Name] and enter the desired name in the text box.

To change the image of a shortcut key, go to the next step. If you are not changing the image, go to step 5.

5

To change the icon image, set the [Use Custom Image] checkbox to √, and select a previously added image with [Select File].

To save an image, see "ADDING A SHORTCUT KEY IMAGE"

6

When you have finished configuring the settings, click the [Submit] button.

The settings are saved in the machine and applied.

When you have finished settings, click the [Logout] button and close your Web browser.

ADDING A SHORTCUT KEY IMAGE

To change a shortcut key image to a new image, you must first add the new image.

This section explains how to add an image. Images are added by using the Web page.

Icon images are automatically enlarged or reduced to match the size of the shortcut keys.

1

Enter the IP address set in the machine in the address bar of your web browser.

In the factory default state, you must enter your user password after entering the IP address.

2

On the Web page, click the [System Settings] tab → [Home Screen Settings].

Some settings may require that you enter your user password after clicking [Home Screen Settings]. If you did not perform user authentication, you must enter the administrator password.

3

Click [Icon].

4

Select any item

If you are adding a new image, click "Not Set". If "Not Set" items are all in use, click an unneeded item in the already added items.

5

Select the file to be added in "Select File".

Click the [Browse] button, and select the image to be submitted.

• File formats that can be used are JPEG, GIF and PNG (jpeg, jpg, jpe, jff, gif and png).
• The maximum file size of an image that can be used for a shortcut key is 50 KB.

When you have finished configuring the settings, click the [Submit] button.

The settings are saved in the machine and applied.

When you have finished settings, click the [Logout] button and close your Web browser.

MOVING A SHORTCUT KEY

This section explains how to move a shortcut key in the home screen.

Shortcut keys are moved by using the touch panel.

1

Open the action panel on the home screen, and tap [Edit Home].

2

The administrator password screen appears. Enter your password.

Enter the administrator password.

3

Tap the shortcut key you want to move, and tap [Move Key].

A yellow frame appears around the selected shortcut key.

4

Tap an empty shortcut key location

The shortcut key moves to the tapped location.

The shortcut key will not move if you tap a location that already has a shortcut key.

5

After completing the settings, tap the [Logout] key.

RETURNING THE SHORTCUT KEYS TO THE FACTORY DEFAULT STATE

This section explains how to return the shortcut keys in the home screen to the factory default state.

This procedure can be performed from the touch panel or from the Web page.

The positions, names, and images of the shortcut keys are returned to the factory default state.

From the touch panel

1

Open the action panel on the home screen, and tap [Edit Home].

2

The administrator password screen appears. Enter your password.

Enter the administrator password.

3

Tap [Return Layout to Factory Default] on the action panel.

4

Tap the [Reset] key.

The shortcut keys are returned to the factory default state.

5

After completing the settings, tap the [Logout] key.

From the Web page

1

Enter the IP address set in the machine in the address bar of your web browser.

In the factory default state, you must enter your user password after entering the IP address.

2

On the Web page, click the [System Settings] tab → [Home Screen Settings].

Some settings may require that you enter your user password after clicking [Home Screen Settings]. If you did not perform user authentication, you must enter the administrator password.

3

Click [Condition Settings], and click the [Return to the Defaults] button.

A confirmation window appears. Click the [OK] button.

4

When you have finished configuring the settings, click the [Submit] button.

The settings are saved in the machine and applied.

When you have finished settings, click the [Logout] button and close your Web browser.

CHANGING THE TRANSPARENCY OF A SHORTCUT KEY

You can change the transparency of the shortcut keys.

If you want to change the background of your home screen to show what's behind the shortcut keys, increase the transparency to make it easier to see what's behind the shortcut keys.

This procedure can be performed from the touch panel or from the Web page.

From the touch panel

1

Open the action panel on the home screen, and tap [Key Transparency Setting].

2

The administrator password screen appears. Enter your password.

Enter the administrator password.

3

Select the level of transparency you wish to set.

4

Tap the [Finish and Return] key.

5

After completing the settings, tap the [Logout] key.

From the Web page

1

Enter the IP address set in the machine in the address bar of your web browser.

In the factory default state, you must enter your user password after entering the IP address.

2

On the Web page, click the [System Settings] tab → [Home Screen Settings].

Some settings may require that you enter your user password after clicking [Home Screen Settings]. If you did not perform user authentication, you must enter the administrator password.

Click [Condition Settings], and click the [Key Transparency Setting] button.

When you have finished configuring the settings, click the [Submit] button.

The settings are saved in the machine and applied.

When you have finished settings, click the [Logout] button and close your Web browser.

CHANGING THE LAYOUT PATTERN OF THE HOME SCREEN

Multiple home screen layout patterns are preset in the machine. These include a layout pattern that reduces the display size of the shortcut keys to increase the number of keys shown, and a layout pattern that eliminates the fixed key display area to increase the number of shortcut keys shown. The layout pattern can be changed in the Web page.

Home screen layout patterns

Six layout patterns are available.

Pattern Number of shortcut keys displayed per screen	Fixed key area Maximum number of screens
1 4 Yes 15 screens
2 8 No 8 screens
3 8 Yes 8 screens
4 12 No 5 screens
5 12 Yes 5 screens
6 18 No 4 screens

Enter the IP address set in the machine in the address bar of your web browser.

In the factory default state, you must enter your user password after entering the IP address.

On the Web page, click the [System Settings] tab → [Home Screen Settings].

Some settings may require that you enter your user password after clicking [Home Screen Settings]. If you did not perform user authentication, you must enter the administrator password.

3

Click [Condition Settings] and select the desired layout pattern from the "Template".

4

When you have finished configuring the settings, click the [Submit] button.

The settings are saved in the machine and applied.

SELECTING A MFP DISPLAY PATTERN FOR THE HOME SCREEN

Multiple colour patterns are preset in the machine. You can change the colour pattern from the touch panel.

1

Open the action panel on the home screen, and tap [MFP Display Pattern Setting].

2

The administrator password screen appears. Enter your password.

Enter the administrator password.

3

Select the desired pattern.

After settings are completed, tap the [Logout] key.

CHANGING THE COLOUR OF TEXT ON THE HOME SCREEN

You can change the colour of the text in shortcut keys, fixed keys, and the clock on the home screen to white or black. The colour is changed using the touch panel.

The colour of text on the home screen varies depending on the layout pattern.

For information about layout patterns of the home screen, see "CHANGING THE LAYOUT PATTERN OF THE HOME SCREEN" (▶ page 2-36).

Factory default text colours

Home screen layout patterns and text colours

Layout Pattern Scrolling Area(Text colour of shortcut key)		Fixed Area(Text colour of fixed keys)	Clock(Text colour of clock)
1 White White Black
2 White No Black
3 Black White Black
4 Black No Black
5 Black White Black
6 Black No Black

Open the action panel on the home screen, and tap [Change Text Colour On Home Screen].

The administrator password screen appears. Enter your password.

Enter the administrator password.

Change the text colour.

4

After settings are completed, tap the [Logout] key.

CHANGING THE BACKGROUND IMAGE OF THE HOME SCREEN

You can change the background image of the home screen to a custom image.

This procedure can be performed from the touch panel or from the Web page.

To change the image from the touch panel, first save the desired image in a USB device and connect the device to the machine.

The display size of the background image is 1024 dots x 544 dots.

The height of the image is adjusted to the display height, and the width is adjusted to the display width.

Because the height and width are enlarged/reduced separately, some images may become distorted.

If you want to display the image correctly, adjust the size of the image to the display size of the background image in advance.

From the touch panel

1

Connect the USB device containing the desired image to the machine.

When the USB device is connected to the machine, the popup window will be appeared. Tap the [OK] key.

2

Tap the [Settings] key on the Home screen.

The screen changes to the settings screen.

3

Tap [System Settings] → [Home Screen Settings] → [Background Image], and then tap [Change] key.

The "Register Background Image" screen will be appeared.

The administrator password entry screen will appear while you are selecting settings. Enter the administrator password and log in.

4

Set the [Use Custom Image] checkbox to , and select the desired image with [Folder Name/File Name].

File formats that can be used are JPEG, GIF and PNG (jpeg, jpg, jpe, jjf, gif and png). The maximum file size of an image that can be used for the background image is 640 KB.

5

Click the [Store] button.

After all U/I customize settings are completed, tap the [Logout] key.

From the Web page

1

Enter the IP address set in the machine in the address bar of your web browser.

In the factory default state, you must enter your user password after entering the IP address.

2

On the Web page, click the [System Settings] tab → [Home Screen Settings].

Some settings may require that you enter your user password after clicking [Home Screen Settings]. If you did not perform user authentication, you must enter the administrator password.

3

Click the [Change] button in [Background Image].

4

Set the [Use Custom Image] checkbox to , and select the image with [Select File].

Click [Browse] to select the image.

File formats that can be used are JPEG, GIF and PNG (jpeg, jpg, jpe, jfif, gif and png).

The maximum file size of an image that can be used for the background image is 640 KB.

5

When you have finished configuring the settings, click the [Submit] button.

The settings are saved in the machine and applied.

When you have finished settings, click the [Logout] button and close your Web browser.

CHANGING THE FIXED KEYS

You can change the fixed keys. The fixed keys are changed using the Web page.

1

Enter the IP address set in the machine in the address bar of your web browser.

In the factory default state, you must enter your user password after entering the IP address.

2

On the Web page, click the [System Settings] tab → [Home Screen Settings].

Some settings may require that you enter your user password after clicking [Home Screen Settings]. If you did not perform user authentication, you must enter the administrator password.

3

Click [Condition Settings], and click the desired item under "Fix Key".

You can click [Not Set] to add a new fixed key.

No.	Fix Key
1	Operation Guide
2	Enlarge Display Mode
3	System Settings
4	Total Count
5	LCD Control
6	Job Status
7	Not Set
8	Not Set
9	Not Set
10	Not Set

4

Select the function you want to add, and click the [Submit] button.

When you click the [Submit] button, the [Home Screen Registration] screen closes.

5

When you have finished configuring the settings, click the [Submit] button.

The settings are saved in the machine and applied.

When you have finished settings, click the [Logout] button and close your Web browser.

INCREASING THE TEXT SIZE

In a Normal mode screen such as copy or image send, you can enlarge the character size and interval. This function is selected on the touch panel.

• The setting keys and the action panel will increase the text size. Setting items that no longer appear on the action panel can be displayed by tapping the scroll keys. Setting keys that no longer appear (the [Exposure] key in this example) can be displayed by tapping the [Others] key.
• In screens other than Normal mode of each function such as Easy mode and settings, the size of characters and keys does not change.
• Increasing the text size may decrease the number of keys displayed in the base screen and other screens of each function.

Tap the [Enlarge Display Mode] key in the home screen.

The key image changes to and enlarge display mode is enabled.

To cancel enlarge display mode, tap the [Enlarge Display Mode] key again. The key image changes to and enlarge display mode is cancelled.

CHANGING THE LANGUAGE USED ON THE MACHINE

You can change the language used in the home screen.

Open the action panel on the home screen, and tap [Edit Home].

2

The administrator password screen appears. Enter your password.

Enter the administrator password.

3

Tap an empty shortcut key location.

4

Tap the function you want to add.

The shortcut key will be added to the selected location.

5

After settings are completed, tap the [Logout] key.

6

Tap the [Language Setting] key on the home screen.

7

Select the desired language and tap

The display changes to the selected language.

From the Web page

Enter the IP address set in the machine in the address bar of your web browser.

In the factory default state, you must enter your user password after entering the IP address.

On the Web page, click the [System Settings] tab → [Common Settings]→ [Operation Settings]→ [Condition Settings]→ [Language Setting].

This settings may require that you enter your user password. If you did not perform user authentication, you must enter the administrator password.

Select the language you want to change from the list.

When you have finished configuring the settings, click the [Submit] button.

The settings are saved in the machine and applied.

When you have finished settings, click the [Logout] button and close your Web browser.

CHANGING THE POSITION OF THE [Home Screen] KEY

You can change the position of the [Home Screen] key.

From the touch panel

Tap the [Settings] key on the Home screen.

The screen changes to the settings screen.

Tap [System Settings] → [Home Screen Settings] and then tap [Home Button Position] key.

The administrator password entry screen will appear while you are selecting settings. Enter the administrator password and log in.

Select [Left] or [Right].

Click the [Store] button.

After settings are completed, tap the [Logout] key.

From the Web page

Enter the IP address set in the machine in the address bar of your web browser.

In the factory default state, you must enter your user password after entering the IP address.

On the Web page, click the [System Settings] tab → [Home Screen Settings] → [Home Button Position].

Some settings may require that you enter your user password after clicking [Home Screen Settings]. If you did not perform user authentication, you must enter the administrator password.

Select [Left] or [Right]

When you have finished configuring the settings, click the [Submit] button.

The settings are saved in the machine and applied. When you have finished settings, click the [Logout] button and close your Web browser.

Display in Arabic

When the display position of the [Home Screen] key is switched in the setting mode of the machine, the [Home Screen] key is displayed on the right when [Left] is selected, and the [Home Screen] key is displayed on the left when [Right] is selected.

JOB STATUS

STOPPING/DELETING A JOB, PRIORITY PROCESSING AND CHECKING THE STATUS

TYPES OF JOB STATUS SCREENS

When you tap the job status display, the job status screen appears. Tap it again to return to the previous mode. The job status screen is divided into the following four tabs, enabling you to select a job list by tapping a desired tab.

- Print

Lists print jobs such as copying, printing from a PC, Scan to FTP job, Scan to Network Folder job, USB direct print, printing of Data List from system settings, reprint jobs and printing for faxed or other received data.

- Scan

Lists send jobs of e-mail messages and FTP/Desktop send jobs.

- Fax

Lists fax send jobs using a telephone line.

- Internet Fax

Lists fax send jobs using Internet Fax.

The background of the job status display changes as follows:

• Green: Job in progress • Yellow: Warming up/waiting • Red: Waiting for error clearing

Jobs move among the lists according to the processing status, from [Spool], [Job Queue] and [Complete], in that order. To switch the job list display to the display by processing status, tap the [Spool], [Job Queue] or [Complete] key as desired.

- Spool list

Lists print jobs up to the transfer to the machine. The jobs move to the Job Queue list after the transfer is completed. If you printed an encrypted PDF file by direct print, enter the password from here to print the file.

- Job Queue list

Lists jobs in progress and in the queue for copying, printing from a computer and printing of received fax. This list also displays jobs in progress and in the queue for sending fax data or sending image. The jobs move to the Complete list after printing or sending is completed.

- Complete list

Lists jobs through with copying, printing, or sending.

STOPPING/DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED

1

Tap the job status display and tap the tab for the job that you wish to stop or delete.

2

Tap the [Job Queue] key.

When you wish to stop a print job being sent from the computer, tap the [Spool] key.

3

Tap the job that you wish to stop or delete, and then tap [Stop/Delete] on the action panel.

When a screen appears that allows you to confirm that you do want to stop the job, tap the [Cancel] key.

• If the machine runs out of paper during a copy or print job, you can cancel the job from the job status screen.
• To delete more than one job, operate the check box for [Enter Plural Selection Mode] on the action panel so that it looks like
• Printing of a received fax or Internet fax cannot be stopped. • A job set for transfer cannot be cancelled.

PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB

This function gives priority to processing of copied, faxed, or image send jobs arising later to jobs already in a queue for printing or sending.

Priority processing operation varies, as follows, depending on the job type.

• Job on the print tab: The job currently in progress is suspended to let the priority job make interruption. • Job on the scanner/fax/Internet fax tab: The priority job is moved directly under the job currently in progress.

1

Tap the job status display and tap the job for priority processing.

2

Tap the [Job Queue] key.

3

Tap the job for priority processing and then tap [Change Job Priority] on the action panel.

Changing the job order

If there is a job in progress, an interrupt job can be performed, or a job can be moved down in the queue to change the job order. Tap the key of the job you want to move, and tap the "Priority Change" key.

• key

Moves the selected job to the top of the queue. The current job will be interrupted and the selected job starts.

• ▲ key

Moves the selected job up one position. When the second job from the top is selected, tapping this key interrupts the current job and starts the selected job.

•▼ key

Moves the selected job down one position.

• key

Moves the selected job to the bottom of the queue.

Scanner job with a timer setting

When a scanner job with a timer setting is selected, tapping the order change keys moves the job as follows.

• key

The timer setting is cancelled and the job moves to the position after the job in progress (second from top).

• ▲ key

The timer setting is cancelled and the job moves to the lowest position in the queue (if there are 3 jobs, the 4th position)

• , key

These keys cannot be used.

The jobs below cannot be moved.

Job currently in progress, interrupt copy jobs, list print jobs, and jobs when Passing Prohibited is set in the system settings.

In print tab, you can switch the display in the "Job Queue" screen between the number of printed copies and remaining copies to be printed for each job.

CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS

1

Tap the job status display and tap the tab for the job whose contents you wish to check.

2

Tap the [Job Queue] key.

3

Tap the job whose contents you wish to check and then tap [Check Details of Selected Job] on the action panel.

• Different job contents appear in different modes.
• For information on the icons displayed on the job keys or the messages displayed in "Status", see "READING THE JOB LIST (page 2-60)".

CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS

1

Tap the job status display and tap the tab for the job whose contents you wish to check.

2

Tap the [Complete] key.

3

Tap the job whose contents you wish to check and then tap [Check Details of Selected Job] on the action panel.

Jobs you can check are displayed as keys so that you can tap them.

• Different job contents appear in different modes.
• For information on the icons displayed on the job keys or the messages displayed in "Status", see "READING THE JOB LIST (page 2-60)".

READING THE JOB LIST

The meaning of each job icon and message displayed in "Status" is as follows: Icons indicating the job type

	Print job (RGB/CMYK) Copy job
	Scan to E-mail job Scan to FTP job
	Scan to Network Folder job Scan to Desktop job
	Fax transmission job Fax reception job
	PC-Fax transmission job Internet fax transmission job (Including	Direct SMTP)
	PC-I-Fax transmission job Scan to Local Drive file print job
	Internet fax reception job (Including Direct SMTP)		Broadcast job* Inbound routing job
	Tandem copy/print job Broadcast job * Inbound routing	job(When a destination is group destination address)*
	OSA Scan Job

* This appears in a broadcast job.

Messages displayed in "Status"

Job in progress

Display Status
"Printing" Print job in progress
"Copying" Copy job in progress
"Connecting" Connecting
"Sending" Sending
"Receiving" Receiving
"Processing" Processing
"Tel" Speaking with the other party using an external telephone
"Stopped" The job has been stopped
"Toner Empty" Toner Empty
"Paper Empty" Paper Empty
"Paper Jam" Paper jam
"Waiting" Waiting
"Warming up" Warming up
"Limit" Having reached the account limit
"Report Wait"	Transmission confirmation reception timeout
"Error"	An error occurred while the job was being executed

Reserved job

Display Status
"Waiting" The job is waiting to be executed
"Retry Mode"	The job is being retried due to a communication error or other problem
"Report Wait"	Waiting for confirmation of Internet fax transmission
A day and time is displayed	Timer transmission job (the specified time is displayed)

Completed job

Display Status
"OK" Normal termination
"Send OK" Transmission was completed.
"NG Ck Line" Fax line cable is not connected
"In Memory" Reception completed but the fax has not been printed.
"Received" Printed received fax data.
"Forward OK"	The received data/received data (each file) has been forwarded.
"FAST" FAST transmission completed.
"Stopped" The job was stopped.
"Delete" Deleted received data in the image check screen.
"Number of successful transmission destinations/Total destinations OK"	Completion of a broadcast transmission, serial polling, or inbound routing operation.
	If transmission to 3 destinations was successful out of a total of 5, "003/005 OK" will appear.
"No Response"	An error occurred because there was no response from the destination.
"Busy" An error occurred because the other party was busy.
"Received"	E-mail other than Internet fax received
"Rejected"	A fax was sent from a party that has been blocked by the anti junk fax function.
"NGxxxxx"	Transmission/reception was not successful because a communication error occurred (a 6-digit error code appears in xxxxxx.)
"Error" An error occurred while the job was being executed.
"Limit"	Jobs exceeding the maximum size of e-mail attachments
"displayed"*	Displayed at the receiving machine when delivery confirmation is set
"dispatched"*	Forwarded elsewhere before being displayed at the receiving machine when delivery confirmation is set
"processed"*	Processed without being displayed at receiving machine when delivery confirmation is set
"deleted"*	Message deleted at receiving machine when delivery confirmation is set
"denied"*	Receiving machine refused to notify sending machine of message processing content when delivery confirmation is set
"failed"*	An abnormal condition occurred when delivery confirmation is set

* If the receiving machine is a SHARP machine, the receiving machine will return "dispatched" if the fax was received normally, or "processed" if reception failed. When delivery confirmation is set for Internet Fax, the disposition field value indicated on the delivery confirmation return e-mail appears.

CHARACTER ENTRY

CHARACTER ENTRY

NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFT KEYBOARD KEYS

Display the soft keyboard to register the name of a file, program, folder or user.

(1) Text input area

Displays the entered text.

(2) Registered word key

Retrieves the stored words. Use "Settings" to store words.

(3) Keyboard

Tap a key to enter text.

The key types vary depending on the selected entry mode.

(4) [Caps] key

Switches the alphabet to upper case. Use this key to enter a series of capital letters.

(5) [Shift] key

Switch the alphabet to uppercase.

(6) Keyboard Select

Switches the key layout.

(7) Pre-Set Select

Use this to retrieve a previously stored subject for e-mail or pre-set text.

(8) [Cancel] key

Exits the soft keyboard.

(9) [OK] key

Finalizes the entered characters and exits the soft keyboard.

(10) [Symbols] key

Switch to other input modes.

(11) Backspace key

Deletes one character to the left.

(12) [Enter] key

Temporarily fixes the converted characters or inserts a line break.

(13) [Space] key

Converts the entered characters. The [Space] key inserts a space between words if there are no characters specified to be converted.

(14) [Space] key

Used to enter accented characters and special symbols.

(15) Cursor keys

Used to move the cursor or to change the range of the specified conversion target.

The soft keyboard shown here is an image for your reference. Different keys may be enabled depending on the actual situation and condition under which you enter characters.

SET THE KEYBOARD SETTING

In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Keyboard Settings].

Keyboard Settings

Default Keyboard Setting

Configure settings for the keyboard used for entry on the text.

Keyboard Select

Change the key layout and display according to the set language.

Set Keyboard Priority

When an external keyboard is connected, set whether the external keyboard or the keyboard shown on the touch panel (soft keyboard) is given priority.

Soft Keyboard Template Setting

Register a text that you frequently use when entering an address or domain name in advance. Enter a maximum of 16 characters.

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER

COPY MODE....3-3

EASY MODE 3-3

NORMAL MODE 3-5

SELECTING COPY MODE 3-5

BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES

COPYING 3-6

DEFAULT SETTINGS FOR COPYING 3-10

CHECKING THE ORIGINAL SIZE 3-11

EASY MODE 3-11

NORMAL MODE 3-11

SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING ..... 3-13

AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING....3-14

USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR 2-SIDED COPYING....3-14

USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR 2-SIDED COPYING....3-15

CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE

TYPE 3-17

AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE 3-17

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE 3-17

ENLARGE/REDUCE 3-19

AUTO RATIO SELECT....3-19

MANUAL RATIO SELECTION 3-19

ENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH AND WIDTH SEPARATELY 3-23

SELECTING THE ORIENTATION AND SIZE OF THE

ORIGINAL 3-26

MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY.....3-31

MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY ..... 3-31 SPECIFYING A TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER LOADED ON BYPASS TRAY ..... 3-32

OUTPUT 3-33

SORT/GROUP SETTING....3-33

STAPLE SETTINGS....3-34

PUNCH SETTINGS 3-37

FOLD SETTING 3-39

INSERTING SEPARATOR PAGES BETWEEN COPIES OR JOBS 3-41

BATCH COPY FUNCTIONS ....3-43

COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS AS A SINGLE PAGE (N-Up)....3-43

COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND DOCUMENT (DUAL PAGE COPY) ....3-45

COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE (CARD SHOT)....3-47

REPEATING THE SAME IMAGE ON ONE SHEET (REPEAT LAYOUT) 3-49

COPYING MULTIPLE BUSINESS CARDS (BUSINESS CARD COPY)....3-54

OTHER FUNCTIONS

OUTPUT AND LAYOUT EDITING FUNCTIONS.....3-57

MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT (BOOKLET)....3-57

COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ON EACH BOOKLET PAGE (BOOKLET 2-Up/4-Up) .....3-60

COPYING A PAMPHLET (BOOK COPY). 3-63 SPLITTING A PAMPHLET ORIGINAL BY PAGE (BOOK DIVIDE). 3-66

PAPER, AND TIME SAVING FUNCTIONS....3-67

SKIPPING BLANK PAGES IN AN ORIGINAL (BLANK PAGE SKIP)....3-67

ADJUSTING THE BACKGROUND BY MAKING LIGHT AREAS OF THE ORIGINAL DARKER OR LIGHTER (BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT). 3-69

MAKING A PROOF COPY (PROOF COPY) .....3-71

CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS (ORIGINAL COUNT)....3-74

USING TWO MACHINES TO REDUCE THE COPY TIME (TANDEM COPY)....3-76

SECURITY REINFORCEMENT FUNCTIONS ..... 3-78

PADDING UNAUTHORISED COPY PREVENTION DATA (HIDDEN PATTERN PRINT)....3-78

OUTPUT POSITION AND MARGIN ADJUSTMENT

FUNCTIONS....3-80

ADDING MARGINS (MARGIN SHIFT)....3-80 ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS FOR COPYING (ERASE)....3-82

COPYING ORIGINALS WITH NO EDGE CUT-OFF (FULL BLEED COPY)....3-84

COPYING IN THE CENTRE OF THE PAPER (CENTRING) 3-85

SPECIFYING A PAPER POSITION (POSITION IMAGE)....3-86

SCANNING FUNCTIONS....3-88

COLLECTIVELY SCANNING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS (JOB BUILD)....3-88

SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES (MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL)....3-91

SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS (SLOW SCAN MODE) 3-94

SCANNING HEAVY ORIGINALS (HEAVY PAPER SCAN) 3-95

ADJUSTING RESOLUTION WHEN SCANNING (RESOLUTION) 3-96

TEXT AND IMAGE ADDITION FUNCTIONS ..... 3-97

PRINTING DATES, PAGE NUMBERS, AND WATERMARKS (STAMP) 3-97

ADDING A REGISTERED IMAGE TO AN ORIGINAL (CUSTOM IMAGE) 3-100

INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS) 3-103

INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS) 3-111

CHECKING, EDITING, AND DELETING THE PAGE LAYOUT OF COVERS AND INSERTION SHEETS (PAGE LAYOUT) 3-115

INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN BETWEEN TRANSPARENCY FILMS (TRANSPARENCY INSERTS) 3-116

FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIFIC USES 3-118

COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER (TAB COPY) 3-118

MAKING A POSTER-SIZED COPY (MULTI-PAGE ENLARGEMENT) 3-121

COPYING WITH MIRROR IMAGE (MIRROR IMAGE) 3-123

OUTPUT AND DENSITY ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 3-124

REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A COPY (B/W REVERSE) 3-124

EASY ADJUSTMENT OF THE IMAGE QUALITY (QUICK IMAGE QUALITY ADJUSTMENT) 3-125

ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE (SHARPNESS) 3-126

THE ADJUST DENSITY AREA FOR COPY (GREY BALANCE) 3-127

CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS

INTERRUPT COPY 3-128

SEND DATA WHILE COPYING 3-129

COPY JOBS 3-130

PROGRAMS 3-131

STORING A PROGRAM 3-131

RETRIEVING A PROGRAM 3-133

DELETING AND RENAMING A PROGRAM 3-134

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER

COPY MODE

There are two modes for copying: easy mode and normal mode.

Easy mode is limited to frequently used functions that allow you to smoothly perform most copy jobs.

If you need to select detailed settings or special functions, use normal mode. All functions can be used in normal mode.

EASY MODE

Easy mode makes it easy to select basic settings for copying.

1st screen

2nd screen

(1) Show the size of the placed original.

SELECTING THE ORIENTATION AND SIZE OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26)

(2) Reset all settings.

(3) Show the size of the placed original.

PREVIEW SCREEN (page 2-11)

(4) Enter the number of copies.

(5) Recently used job setting can be loaded.

▶ JOB STATUS (page 2-53)

(6) Starts copying.

(7) Change the function display.

(8) Select function to be set up.

(9) Change to normal mode.

NORMAL MODE (page 3-5)

The following features can be set in easy mode.

• Paper Select SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 3-13) • 2-Side Copy AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING (page 3-14) • Copy Ratio ENLARGE/REDUCE (page 3-19) • Staple/Punch OUTPUT (page 3-33) • Original SELECTING THE ORIENTATION AND SIZE OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26) • Exposure CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE (page 3-17) • N-Up COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS AS A SINGLE PAGE (N-Up) (page 3-43) • Card Shot COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE (CARD SHOT) (page 3-47) • Job Build COLLECTIVELY SCANNING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS (JOB BUILD) (page 3-88) • Blank Page Skip SKIPPING BLANK PAGES IN AN ORIGINAL (BLANK PAGE SKIP) (page 3-67) • Dual Page Copy COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND DOCUMENT (DUAL PAGE COPY) (page 3-45)

• To select a function in easy mode

In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Easy Mode Settings] → [Easy Copy].

- To cancel the warning message displayed when switching from easy mode to normal mode

In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Easy Mode Settings] → [Display a Confirmation Message when Selecting "Detail" in Easy Modes] to disable this setting.

NORMAL MODE

Normal mode lets you select any function setting that can be used for copying.

(1) Setting keys used for copying. (2) Your favorite setting items will be displayed. Register frequently used [Other] and programs. Favorites can be registered when you register a program. (3) Check the current settings. (4) Display keys other than the Setting keys indicated above. (5) Indicates the presence or absence of an original and the size of paper loaded in each tray. Tap to open the paper select screen.

(6) Starts copying. (7) Reset all settings. (8) Scans the original and shows a preview image. PREVIEW SCREEN (page 2-11) (9) Displays the functions that can be utilized in copy mode. (10) Enter the number of copies.

The displayed contents of the above screen will vary depending on the devices installed.

SELECTING COPY MODE

Change the copy mode to another mode as explained in CHANGING MODES (page 2-10).

BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES

COPYING

This section explains the basic procedure for copying. Select settings in the order shown below to ensure that the copy operation takes place smoothly.

For detailed procedures for selecting the settings, see the explanation of each setting in this chapter.

1

Switch to copy mode.

SELECTING COPY MODE (page 3-5)

2

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

3

Select functions.

Specify the original scan size, exposure, resolution, etc.

Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. SPECIFYING THE ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26)

In Easy mode SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page

3-13)

AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING (page 3-14)

AUTO RATIO SELECT (page 3-19)

OUTPUT (page 3-33)

SELECTING THE ORIENTATION AND SIZE OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26)

AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE (page 3-17)

COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS AS A SINGLE PAGE (N-Up) (page 3-43)

COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE (CARD SHOT) (page 3-47)

COLLECTIVELY SCANNING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS (JOB BUILD) (page 3-88)

SKIPPING BLANK PAGES IN AN ORIGINAL (BLANK PAGE SKIP) (page 3-67)

COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND DOCUMENT (DUAL PAGE COPY) (page 3-45)

In Normal mode

SELECTING THE ORIENTATION AND SIZE OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26)

SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 3-13)

AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING (page 3-14)

ENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH AND WIDTH SEPARATELY (page 3-23)

AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE (page 3-17)

OUTPUT (page 3-33)

OTHER FUNCTIONS (page 3-57)

4

Scan the original.

Tap the [Preview] key to scan the original.

In Easy mode

In Normal mode

• To make 2-sided copies, configure the 2-sided copy settings before scanning the original. AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING (page 3-14) - When not checking the preview image, tap the [Start] key to start copying.

5

Check the preview image.

Display the preview image of the scanned original.

In the preview screen, check the settings.

PREVIEW SCREEN (page 2-11)

In Easy mode

In Normal mode

6

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies.

• To cancel all settings, tap the [CA] key. When the [CA] key is tapped, all settings selected to that point are cleared and you will return to the base screen. - To cancel copying, tap the [Cancel Copy] key.

• To make two or more sets of copies:

Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies. In Easy mode

In Normal mode

- In normal mode, you can tap [File] or [Quick File] on the action panel before starting the copy job to save the scanned original as a file. QUICK FILE (page 7-9) FILE (page 7-10)

DEFAULT SETTINGS FOR COPYING

Set in "Default Settings" of "Copy Settings" in the System Settings.

CHECKING THE ORIGINAL SIZE

EASY MODE

The size of the placed original is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen.

When you place the original in the automatic document feeder, the original icon appears next to the original size.

NORMAL MODE

Check the size of the placed original on the display of the [Original] key.

If the original size is set to [Auto], the automatically detected size (standard size) is displayed. If the original size is specified manually, the specified original size is displayed.

When you place the original in the automatic document feeder, the original icon appears above the automatic document feeder.

Standard sizes

Standard sizes are sizes that the machine can automatically detect.

For standard sizes that can be detected, refer to DETECTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES (page 1-28).

- Even when [Original] is set to [Auto], some original sizes may be detected as another size that is near the standard size. In this case, manually set the original size.

SELECTING THE ORIENTATION AND SIZE OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26)

- When placing a non-standard size original on the document glass, you can make it easier for the size to be detected by placing a blank sheet of A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"), or other standard size of paper on top of the original.

Orientation of placed original

Place the original as shown below.

If you place the original in an incorrect orientation, it may result in punching at an unexpected position or stapling.

On the Preview Screen, view the image orientation or preview image.

PREVIEW SCREEN (page 2-11)

Document glass
Document feeder tray

Set the orientation of the image to ensure that the orientation of the placed original is correctly recognized.

For information on the orientation of the original, see "SPECIFYING THE ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26)".

Automatic copy image rotation (Rotation Copy)

If the orientation is different between the original and paper, the original image will be automatically rotated 90 degrees to match the paper.

SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING

The machine is set to automatically select a tray that has the same size of paper as the size of the placed original (Auto Paper Select).

If the original size cannot be detected correctly because it is a non-standard size or when you want to change the paper size for copying, you can select the paper tray manually.

• If the selected tray runs out of paper during a copy job and there is another tray that has the same size and type of paper, that tray will be automatically selected and the copy job will continue.
• If a suitable size of copy paper is not loaded, copying may stop.

1

Tap the [Paper Select] key.

BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES (page 3-6)

2

Tap the required tray key.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

In Easy mode

In Normal mode

• When the bypass tray is selected, specify the paper type and size based on the paper loaded into the bypass tray. SPECIFYING A TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER LOADED ON BYPASS TRAY (page 3-32)
• In normal mode, you can also open the [Paper Select] screen by tapping the machine image on the base screen.

To automatically select the tray, tap the [Auto] key.

AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING

USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR 2-SIDED COPYING

Originals

Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-side originals

Copies Originals Copies Originals Copies

Automatic 2-sided copying of 2-side originals

1-sided copying of 2-sided originals

• To make 2-sided copies, configure the 2-sided copy settings before scanning the original.
• Dual-side copy helps to save paper.

1

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

2

Tap the [2-Sided Copy] key.

PREVIEW SCREEN (page 2-11)

3

Select 2-sided copy mode.

(1) Select the 2-sided copy type. (2) When the original is set to "2-Sided", select "Book" or "Tablet" in "Original Binding". (3) When the output is set to "2-Sided", select "Book" or "Tablet" in "Output Binding". (4) After the settings are completed, tap [OK].

4

Check the paper (tray) you want to use for copying, and tap the keys for any other settings you want to select.

Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. SPECIFYING THE ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26)

For details on the functions that can be set, see step 3 in "COPYING (page 3-6)".

5

Check the preview.

PREVIEW SCREEN (page 2-11)

6

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR 2-SIDED COPYING

Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals

Dual-side copy helps to save paper.

1

Place the original on the document glass.

DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

2

Tap the [2-Sided Copy] key.

BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES (page 3-6)

3

Select the 2-sided copy mode.

(1) Tap the [1->2] key. (2) When the output is set to "2-Sided", select "Book" or "Tablet" in "Output Binding". (3) After the settings are completed, tap [OK].

• The [2->2] key and [1->2] key cannot be used when copying from the document glass.
• Depending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not selected automatically. In this event, change the paper tray manually.

4

Check the paper (tray) you want to use for copying, and tap the keys for any other settings you want to select.

Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. SPECIFYING THE ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26)

For details on the functions that can be set, see step 3 in "COPYING (page 3-6)".

5

Tap the [Start] key.

6

Set the next original, and tap the [Start] key to scan the original.

Tap the same key you tapped in step 5.

Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.

7

Tap the [Read-End] key to start copying.

CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE

AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE

Automatic exposure adjustment operates by default to automatically adjust the exposure level and original type as appropriate for the original being copied. ([Auto] is displayed.)

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE

This section explains how to select the original type depending on the original to be copied or manually adjust the exposure.

1

Tap the [Exposure] key.

COPY MODE (page 3-3)

2

Tap or slide the slider to adjust the copy exposure.

After the adjustment, tap [OK] key.

This completes the procedure in easy mode.

3

To select more detailed settings, tap the [Detail] key to switch to normal mode.

EASY MODE (page 3-3)

4

Tap the [Exposure] key.

5

Tap the required original image type key to specify the original type.

Tap the key matching the original.

Original image type select keys

• Text: Use this mode for regular text documents.
• Text/Printed Photo: This mode provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and printed photographs, such as a magazine or catalogue.
• Text/Photo: This mode provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and photographs, such as a text document with a photo pasted on.
• Printed Photo: This mode is best for copying printed photographs, such as photos in a magazine or catalogue.
• Photo: Use this mode to copy photos.
• Map: This mode is best for copying the light colour shading and fine text found on most maps. • Light Original: Use this mode for originals with light pencil writing.

• When using a copy or printed page from the machine as an original: When using a copy or printed page from the machine as an original, tap the [Copy of Copy] checkbox so that appears. [Copy of Copy] is available when [Auto], [Text], [Printed Photo], or [Text/Printed Photo] is selected as the original image type.
• When you want to make fluorescent marker parts more visible: When using a page with highlighted lines as an original, tap the [Copy Original with Highlighted Lines] checkbox so that √ appears.

6

Tap the slider to adjust the copy exposure.

If you adjust the exposure with the original type selected to [Auto], the original image type is automatically selected to [Text/Printed Photo].

After the adjustment, tap [OK].

Guidelines for the exposure level when [Text] is selected for "Exposure/Original Type"

1 to 2: Dark originals such as a newspaper

3: Normal density originals

4 to 5: Originals written in pencil or light coloured text

1 to 2: Dark originals such as a newspaper 3: Normal density originals 4 to 5: Originals written in pencil or light coloured text

ENLARGE/REDUCE

AUTO RATIO SELECT

This section explains how to automatically select the appropriate ratio to meet the paper size when manually changing the paper tray to make a copy on paper that has a size different from the original.

For a non-standard size original, the size must be entered in order to use Auto Image.

1 Manually select the paper tray, and place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.

SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 3-13)

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

2 Tap the [Copy Ratio] Key.

COPY MODE (page 3-3)

3

Tap the [Auto Image] key.

The reduction or enlargement ratio is automatically selected based on the original size and the selected paper size. The automatically selected ratio will appear in the ratio display.

•To cancel the Auto Ratio Selection setting:

Tap [Auto Image] to deselect it.

•To return the ratio to 100%:

Tap the [100%] key.

MANUAL RATIO SELECTION

This section explains how to specify any ratio when making a copy on paper that has a size different from the original or changing the image size for copying.

The following three methods can be used to specify the ratio.

Using the preset ratio key

You can select the enlargement or reduction ratio between commonly used fixed sizes from the preset ratio keys.

Up to two ratio values can be added to preset ratio keys, respectively for enlargement and reduction.

Specifying the desired zoom ratio

You can adjust the zoom ratio in 1% increments using the 10 key to specify the desired zoom ratio.

Specifying the paper size

Specify the paper sizes of the original and output to automatically obtain the appropriate ratio.

For example, when you select A3 as the original size and A4 as the paper size, the ratio is automatically set to 70%.

Original size: A3 Copy size: A4

Specifying the image dimensions

Specify the image sizes of the original and output to automatically obtain the appropriate ratio.

To make a copy with the same ratio between the vertical and horizontal sizes, enter either one of the vertical and horizontal sizes.

For example, when you enter 90mm as the source size and 135mm as the output size, the aspect ratio will be automatically set to 150%.

Image size: 90mm Output size: 135mm

When the automatic document feeder is used, the vertical and horizontal ratio selection ranges are both between 25% to 200%.

To return the ratio to 100%: Tap the [100%] key.

Using the preset ratio key

1

Tap the [Copy Ratio] key.

COPY MODE (page 3-3)

2

Tap to set the ratio.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key. Check that a paper size suitable for the ratio is selected.

• If you tap the [Slightly Reduce (3% Reduction)] key, the ratio will be set lower than the specified one by 3%. In normal mode
• There are two setting screens. Use the [Other Ratio] key to switch between the screens.
• To quickly set the area, first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys, then adjust it with - +.
• Up to two frequently used ratio values can be added to the preset ratio key, respectively for enlargement and reduction.

To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

Specifying the paper size

1

Tap the [Copy Ratio] key.

COPY MODE (page 3-3)

2

Specify the original size (paper size of the loaded original) and the copy size (paper size of the copy output).

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

Specifying the image dimensions

1

Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.

EASY MODE (page 3-3)

2

Tap the [Copy Ratio] key.

3

Tap the [by Size] key of the [Zoom] tab.

4

Specify the image size (dimensions of the image to be enlarged or reduced) and the output size (dimensions of the enlarged and reduced images).

Tap the area of image size and output size, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

- If you have entered an incorrect size:

Tap the [C] key on the numeric keys that appears when you tap the entry area, and set to the correct size.

•To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

ENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH AND WIDTH SEPARATELY

This section explains how to individually specify the horizontal and vertical copy ratios.

When 50% is selected for the horizontal ratio and 70% is selected for the vertical ratio

The following two methods can be used to specify the ratio.

Using the preset ratio key

Specify any ratio by combination of preset ratio key, which is pre-registered.

Specify the desired ratio

Specify any ratio by combining which allows you to adjust the ratio in 1% increments.

Specifying the image dimensions

Specify the image sizes of the original and output to automatically obtain the appropriate ratio.

Enter the vertical and horizontal sizes.

When the automatic document feeder is used, the vertical and horizontal ratio selection ranges are both between 25% to 200%.

To cancel the XY zoom setting:

Tap the [Zoom] tab or the [CA] key.

Using the preset ratio key

1

Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.

EASY MODE (page 3-3)

2

Tap the [Copy Ratio] key, and then tap the [XY Zoom] tab.

3

Tap the [X] key, and set the X (horizontal) ratio.

• To quickly set the ratio, first specify a value close to the desired one, then adjust it with - + .
• Tap each area of the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) directions, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys.

4

Tap the [Y] key, and set the Y (vertical) ratio in the same way as the [X] key.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

Check that a paper size suitable for the ratio is selected.

Specifying the image dimensions

1

Tap the [by Size] key.

Using the preset ratio key (page 3-21)

2

Specify the X and Y dimensions of the image size and those of the output size.

Check that a paper size suitable for the ratio is selected. After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

Tap the image size and output size areas, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys.

- If you have entered an incorrect size:

Tap the [C] key on the numeric keys that appears when you tap the entry area, and set to the correct size.

•To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

SELECTING THE ORIENTATION AND SIZE OF THE ORIGINAL

When the original size is a non-standard size or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size. Set the orientation of the image to ensure that the orientation of the placed original is correctly recognized.

Set the orientation and size of the original before scanning the original.

By specifying the starting side (top or left side) of the placed original, the orientation of the original will be correctly recognized. Finishing position settings and N-Up layout settings are specified using the recognized orientation.

In Easy mode

In Normal mode

SPECIFY THE ORIENTATION AND SIZE OF THE ORIGINAL

1

Tap the [Original] key to set the orientation of the original.

COPY MODE (page 3-3)

2

Tap the [Auto] key.

Tap the appropriate original size key.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

SPECIFYING THE ORIENTATION AND SIZE OF A NON-STANDARD SIZE ORIGINALS

1

Tap the [Original] key to set the orientation of the original.

COPY MODE (page 3-3)

2

Tap the [Auto] key.

3

Tap the [Direct Entry] key.

4

Specify the original size.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

• Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys.
• It is convenient to use to finely adjust the entered size.

5

Tap the [OK] key.

Make sure that the original size you have set is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen.

STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES

Store the frequently used non-standard original sizes. This section explains how to store, retrieve, change, and delete non-standard original sizes.

• The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is turned off.
• A total of up to 12 non-standard original sizes can be registered for copying, fax, and image sending.
• The added original sizes will also appear in other modes.
• You can register, modify, and delete the original size only in Normal mode.

STORING ORIGINAL SIZES (AMEND/DELETE)

1

Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.

EASY MODE (page 3-3)

2

Tap the [Original] key.

3

Tap the [Custom Size] tab.

4

Tap [Store/Delete Original Size] on the action panel.

5

Tap a key () for storing a custom original size.

Tap a key that does not show a size.

To amend or delete a previously stored key:

Tap the key that you want to amend or delete. The following screen will appear.

•To amend the key, tap the [Amend] key and go to the next step. - To delete the key, tap the [Delete] key. Make sure that the original size has been cleared and tap the [OK] key.

6

Specify the original size.

Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys.

It is convenient to use to finely adjust the entered size.

7

Tap the [OK] key.

After the settings are completed, tap the ✗ key, and check that the key of the size stored on the original screen is added properly. After you have checked it, tap [OK].

To cancel the operation:

Tap the [CA] key.

Retrieving a stored original size

1

Perform steps 1 to 2 in SPECIFY THE ORIENTATION AND SIZE OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26).

2

Tap the [Custom Size] key.

3

Tap the key of the original size that you wish to retrieve.

After selecting the key of the original size, tap the [OK] key.

To cancel the operation

Tap the [CA] key.

4

Tap the [OK] key.

Make sure that the original size you have set is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen.

MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY

MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY

In addition to plain paper, the bypass tray allows you to make copies on transparency film, envelopes, tab paper, and other special media.

For detailed information on paper that can be loaded into the bypass tray, see "APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES (page 1-12)". For precautions on loading paper into the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-22)".

1

Load paper into the bypass tray.

LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-22)

2

Tap the [Paper Select] key, and tap the bypass tray key.

The bypass tray key displays the size and type of the loaded paper. SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 3-13)

When the setting requires change, tap the [Type and Size] key and select the paper size and type. SPECIFYING A TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER LOADED ON BYPASS TRAY (page 3-32)

3

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

4

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

SPECIFYING A TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER LOADED ON BYPASS TRAY

1

Tap the [Paper Select] key.

SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 3-13)

2

Tap the [Type and Size] key, and tap the key that meets the type of the loaded paper.

3

Tap the [Size] tab, and tap the key that meets the size of the loaded paper.

•[Auto-AB]:

Automatically detects the appropriate AB paper size when loading paper such as A4 or B5.

•[Auto-Inch]:

Automatically detects the appropriate inch paper size when loading paper such as 8-1/2"x11".

•[Size Set]:

Tap this key to manually specify the paper size that is not detected automatically.

•[Direct Entry]:

Tap this key to enter a numeric value for the size of the loaded paper.

• After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

To directly enter a paper size

Tap the [inch] key to set a paper size in inches, or tap the [AB] key to set it in millimetres.

After you have entered the paper size using the key, tap the [OK] key.

OUTPUT

SORT/GROUP SETTING

This section explains how to select the sorting method when outputting the scanned original.

Auto	Enables the sort mode when the original is placed in the automatic document feeder, and enables the group mode when the original is placed on the document glass.
Sort Sorts the scanned original on a set basis, and outputs them.Example: When 5 is set for the number of copies in sorting
Group	Groups the scanned original on a page basis, and outputs them.Example: When 5 is set for the number of copies in grouping

1

Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.

EASY MODE (page 3-3)

Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. SPECIFYING THE ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26)

2

Tap the [Sort/Group] key.

If a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is installed, tap the [Sort/ Group] key in [Others].

3

Select the sorting method.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

• You can select the offset output checkbox to have each set of output offset from the previous set, making it easier to remove them from the output tray.
• To change the output tray, tap the [Output Tray] key and select the output destination.

STAPLE SETTINGS

Specify whether or not the set of output will be stapled.

Portrait orientation

Original Orientation	Staple	Staple Position
		Left Top Right
Portrait orientation 1 Staples
	2 Staples
	Stapleless Staple
Landscape orientation 1	Staples
	2 Staples
	Stapleless Staple

• You can view staple positions on the "PREVIEW SCREEN (page 2-11)". Text will be printed at the preset size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size setting.
• An inner finisher, finisher, finisher (large stacker), saddle stitch finisher, or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is required to use the staple function.
• A saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is required to use the saddle stitch function.
• An inner finisher, finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is required to use the stapleless staple.

Staple ON (excluding saddle stitch)

1 Tap the [Staple / Punch] key.

COPY MODE (page 3-3)

Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. SPECIFYING THE ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26)

2

Select the number of staples and staple position.

• After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.
• A binding position cannot be selected for stapleless stapling.

In normal mode

- Tap the [Staple Sort] key.

• To change the output paper output tray, select the output destination in [Output Tray] of [Other functions] before setting the staples.
• If the number of scanned originals exceeds the staple sheet limit, a message is displayed. Tap [Continue] or [Cancel]. [Cancel]: Cancels the staple sort setting. [Continue]: Continues sorting without stapling.

Saddle Stitch

Tap the [Staple / Punch] key.

COPY MODE (page 3-3)

Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. SPECIFYING THE ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26)

2

Select .

3

Select binding edge and original settings.

MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT (BOOKLET) (page 3-57)

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

In normal mode

• If [Booklet] is already specified in [Others], you do not need configure binding edge and cover settings.
• If [Booklet] is specified in [Others], the saddle stitch screen appears. Confirm the message shown on the screen, and tap the [On] key.
• If the number of scanned originals exceeds the staple sheet limit, a message is displayed. Tap [Divide], [Continue] or [Cancel]. [Cancel]: Cancels printing. [Divide]: Divide the document into the number of sheets that can be stapled and saddle staple them. [Continue]: Continue printing without saddle stapling. Note that [Divide] may not be displayed depending on the setting status.

PUNCH SETTINGS

This function punches copies and outputs them to the tray.

Example: When the original is in either portrait or landscape orientation, and the punch position is set to the left

Original 1 Punch Positions

Original 2 Punch Positions

Original Orientation	Punch Position
	Left Top Right
OFF Does not punch.
Portrait orientation
Landscape orientation

• When staple and punch are set at the same time, punch positions are linked to staple positions.
• You can view punch positions on the "PREVIEW SCREEN (page 2-11)". • A punch module is required for paper punch.
• You cannot use A3W (12" x 18") size paper or special media such as transparency film and tab paper.
• You cannot use a paper punch together with the staple and paper folding. • However, it can be used with them if the paper size used is A3, B4, 8K or 11" × 17" for Z-fold.

1 Tap the [Staple 7 Punch] Key. COPY MODE (page 3-3)

Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. SPECIFYING THE ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26)

2 Select punching and set the position. After the settings are completed, tap [OK].

In normal mode

• You can select the offset output checkbox easy removal from the output tray. ☑ to have each set of output be offset from the previous set to enable Tray] key, and select the output destination.

FOLD SETTING

This function is used to fold copies before delivery to the output tray.

When a paper folding unit is installed, you can fold papers in Z-fold and C-fold.

When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, you can use saddle folds.

The paper sizes that can be selected vary depending on the type of paper fold.

Example: Fold Inside, Fold Outside

• A saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is required to use the fold function.
• The fold function cannot be used in combination with the staple function and punch function. However, when the finisher or saddle stitch finisher is installed and the paper size to be used for Z-folding is A3, B4, 11" x 17", or 8K, the punch function can be used together. In addition, when the finisher (large capacity) or saddle stitch finisher (large capacity) is installed, and when the paper size to be used for Z-folding is A3, B4, 11" x 17", or 8K, the staple function and punch function can be used together.
• The folding function cannot be combined with the staple function or punch function.
• You can check the selected folding method in "PREVIEW SCREEN (page 2-11)".

Types of folds and paper sizes available

Fold Paper Size Image
Saddle Fold A3W, A3, B4,	A4R, B5R *1, 8K,16KR, 12" × 18", 11" × 17", 8-1/2" ×14", 8-1/2" × 13-1/2" *2, 8-1/2" ×13-2/5" *2, 8-1/2" × 13" *2, 8-1/2" ×11"R
Half Fold A4R, A3, B4, A4R,	11" × 17", 8-1/2"× 14", 8-1/2" × 13-2/5", 8-1/2" ×11"R, 8K
C-Fold A3, A4R, 11" × 17",	8-1/2" × 14",8-1/2" × 13-2/5", 8-1/2" × 11"R

Fold Paper Size Image
Accordion Fold A3, A4R, 11" × 17", 8-1/2" × 14",8-1/2" × 13-2/5", 8-1/2" × 11"R
Z-Fold A3, B4, A4R, 8K, 11" × 17", 8-1/2" ×14", 8-1/2" × 13-2/5", 8-1/2" ×11"R*1

*1 Cannot be used when a finisher (large capacity) or saddle stitch finisher (large capacity) is installed. *2 Cannot be used when a finisher or saddle finisher is installed.

1

Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.

EASY MODE (page 3-3)

Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized.

SPECIFYING THE ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26)

2

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Fold] key.

3

Select the folding method.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

INSERTING SEPARATOR PAGES BETWEEN COPIES OR JOBS

This function inserts separator pages between each set of copies or between each job.

When you insert separator pages between sets of copies, you can specify whether to insert the separator page before or after each set. You can also specify the number of copies that makes one set.

When you insert separator pages between jobs, you can specify whether to insert a separator page before or after each job.

Separator page insertion examples

In the following examples, four copies of a two-page original are output.

Inserting a separator page before each set of two copies

Inserting a separator page after each set of two copies

Inserting separator pages before and after a job

• When this function is combined with Sort/Group and Staple/Punch, Sort/Group and Staple/Punch are not applied to the separator pages.
• This function cannot be used with the saddle stitch or fold function.
• When used in combination with the offset function, a separator page is never offset by itself; the separator page is always offset together with the set of output.

Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.

EASY MODE (page 3-3)

Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized.

SPECIFYING THE ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26)

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Separator Page] key.

Specify the separator page insertion mode.

• To insert separator pages between sets of copies, set the [Insert Top of Sets] or [Insert End of Sets] checkbox to . Next, tap to specify the number of copies in each set.
• To insert separator pages between jobs, set the [Insert Before Job] or [Insert After Job] checkbox to √ • After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

To change the separator page tray:

Tap the [Paper Tray] key to display the tray selection screen. Tap the separator page tray in the tray selection screen. For more information, see "SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 3-13)" and "SPECIFYING A TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER LOADED ON BYPASS TRAY (page 3-32)".

To cancel the separator page insertion setting:

Clear the checkmark for separator page insertion mode.

BATCH COPY FUNCTIONS

COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS AS A SINGLE PAGE (N-Up)

This function copies multiple original pages onto a single sheet of paper in a uniform layout.

Select 2-Up to copy two original pages onto one sheet, 4-Up to copy four original pages onto one sheet, or 8-Up to copy eight original pages onto one sheet.

This function is convenient when you wish to present multiple pages in a compact format, or show a view of all pages in a document.

2-Up copying 4-Up copying

When inserting a cover sheet, select Cover Setting to copy only a front sheet to one page and collectively copy the second and subsequent pages.

To use N-Up in Easy mode

In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Easy Mode Settings] → [Easy Copy].

1

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

- When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, change the original and tap the [Start] key. - In Normal mode, go to step 4.

2

Tap the [N-Up] key.

COPY MODE (page 3-3)

Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized.

SPECIFYING THE ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26)

3

Tap the number of originals you want to copy collectively, and select the layout key.

If needed, the images will be rotated.

If you have finished selecting settings, go to step 7.

4

To select more detailed settings, tap the [Detail] key to switch to normal mode.

EASY MODE (page 3-3)

5

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [N-Up] key.

6

Tap [Border], and select the border.

A line can be inserted between pages arranged on a sheet. After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

•To cancel the N-Up setting:

Tap the [Off] key.

•To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

7

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND DOCUMENT (DUAL PAGE COPY)

This function copies the left and right half of an original successively. This function is useful when making copies of the facing pages of a book or other bound document.

Copying the facing pages of a book or bound document

Books and bound documents are copied into 2 separate pages.

• Specify dual page copy before scanning the original.
• To erase shadows caused by the binding of a book or other bound document, use the erase function. This function cannot be used in combination with Centre Erase.
• This function cannot be used in combination with 2-sided Original and Image Orientation: Horizontal.

To use Dual Page Copy in Easy mode

In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Easy Mode Settings] → [Easy Copy].

Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.

EASY MODE (page 3-3)

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Dual Page Copy] key.

A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [OK] key.

When dual page copy is selected, A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size paper is automatically selected. If you want to use paper in another tray, tap the [Paper Select] key and select the tray containing the desired paper from the paper tray selection screen that appears. SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 3-13)

To cancel the dual page copy setting: Tap the [Dual Page Copy] key to uncheck it.

Place the original on the document glass.

DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE (CARD SHOT)

This function copies the front and reverse sides of a card on one sheet, not on separate sheets.

This function is convenient for making copies for identification purposes and helps save paper.

For example, both sides of a card can be copied to a single sheet in A4 portrait or landscape.

Front

Example of an A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size portrait copy

1

Select the paper to be used for card shot.

Set a paper by referring to the "SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 3-13)".

2

Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.

EASY MODE (page 3-3)

3

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Card Shot] key.

4

Tap the [On] key, and specify the original size as required.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.

• Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys.
• If the image is missing, enter a slightly larger size.
• To quickly set the size, first specify a value close to the desired ratio value by the numeric keys, then adjust it by tapping - - - .
• When you set the [Adjust to Paper Size] checkbox to √, the original is enlarged or reduced with the ratio appropriate to the original size.

To cancel the Card Shot settings:

Tap the [Off] key.

5

Place a card face down on the document glass, and tap the [Start] key.

DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

If the image is missing, shift the original inward and set it.

6

Place a card face up on the document glass, and tap the [Start] key to scan the reverse side.

- Copy settings cannot be changed when scanning additional pages.

•To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

7

Tap the [Read-End] key to start copying.

REPEATING THE SAME IMAGE ON ONE SHEET (REPEAT LAYOUT)

This function copies multiple same original images on one sheet.

You can set any of the following three types of repeat copy.

Repeat method Description
Auto Repeat	The maximum repeat count to copy images on a sheet is calculated automatically according to the original size, paper size, and copy ratio being selected from the base screen.
Fixed Repeat	When you select a repeat count, original size, and paper size to copy images on a sheet, the copy ratio is calculated automatically and the original is copied.
Photo Repeat	This function repeatedly copies on A4 (8-1/2" x 11") or A3 (11" x 17") papers without changing the copy ratio of the photo size original. You can select any of the following five types of original size:• E/L Size, Postcard (Up to 148 mm x 105 mm (3" x 5"))• Up to 100 mm x 150 mm (5" x 7")• Card (Up to 70 mm x 100 mm (2-1/2" x 4"))• ID Photo (Up to 65 mm x 70 mm (2-1/2" x 2-1/2"))• Card (Up to 57 mm x 100 mm (2-1/8" x 2-5/8"))* Reduction will be 95%.

• Repeat Layout cannot be selected in easy mode.
• Repeat Layout must be specified before scanning the original.
• If the copy ratio automatically obtained in [Fixed Repeat] exceeds 25 to 400% (using document glass) or 25 to 200% (using automatic document feeder), it will result in an error. Select the number of faces to repeat again.
• Always place an original on the document glass for photo repeating.
• Repeat Layout can be combined with Staple / Punch or Saddle Stitch.

• This function cannot be combined with Mixed Size Original or 2-Sided Copy.
• Photo Repeat cannot be combined with Image Orientation.

Copy by automatically calculating the repeat count (Auto Repeat)

1 Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

2 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. EASY MODE (page 3-3)

3 Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Repeat Layout] key.

Tap the [Auto Repeat] key.

5

Check the repeat faces which have been calculated automatically.

Change the original size, paper size, or copy ratio by tapping the respective [Original], [Paper Select], or [Copy Ratio] key when necessary. SELECTING THE ORIENTATION AND SIZE OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26) MANUAL RATIO SELECTION (page 3-19) SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 3-13)

Set so that there are one or more repeat faces.

6

Tap the [Layout] key.

Tap the [Layout w/o spacing] key or the [Layout evenly spaced] key, and then tap the [OK] key.

7

Specify the repeat partition line.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

•To cancel the Auto Repeat setting:

Tap the [Off] key.

•To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

8

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

Copy by specifying a repeat count (Fixed Repeat)

1

Perform steps 1 to 3 in Copy by automatically calculating the repeat count (Auto Repeat) (page 3-50).

2

Tap the [Fixed Repeat] key.

3

Tap the [Original] and [Paper Select] keys to select an original size and a paper size, respectively.

SELECTING THE ORIENTATION AND SIZE OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26)

SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 3-13)

4

Tap [No. of Faces] to set a repeat count.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

The automatic calculation result is shown as the copy ratio.

If the calculated copy ratio exceeds the range from 25% to 400% (using document glass) or 25 to 200% (using automatic document feeder), an error occurs.

5

Tap the [Layout] key.

Tap the [Layout w/o spacing] key or the [Layout evenly spaced] key, and then tap the [OK] key.

6

Specify the repeat partition line.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

•To cancel the fixed repeat setting: Tap the [Off] key. •To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.

7

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

Repeat a photo size original in actual size (Photo Repeat)

1

Perform steps 1 to 3 in Copy by automatically calculating the repeat count (Auto Repeat) (page 3-50).

2

Tap the [Photo Repeat] key.

3

Place the original on the document glass.

4

Tap the [Original] key and select an original size.

When you tap the original size key, the original direction is indicated in the "How To Set". Place the original to meet the displayed orientation.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

5

Tap the [Paper Select] key and select a paper size.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.

The automatic calculation result is shown as the copy ratio.

When you tap the [*Up to 57x100mm(Card) *\~ 2 1/8 x 2 5/8"] key on the [Original] screen, you can select the A4 paper size only.

•To cancel the photo repeat setting:

Tap the [Off] key.

•To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

6

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

COPYING MULTIPLE BUSINESS CARDS (BUSINESS CARD COPY)

Business Card Copy can be used to copy up to 8 business cards on one sheet of paper.

This function can be used when you want to create the list of business cards, and when you want to file business cards.

1-Sheet Layout, 2-Sheet Layout, 8-Sheet Layout

• Business Card Copy cannot be selected in easy mode.
• Business Card Copy cannot be selected on BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65.

1

Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.

EASY MODE (page 3-3)

2

Place a business card, and select the paper to be used to copy the card.

Refer to "SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 3-13)" to select the paper.

3

Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Business Card Copy] key.

4

Specify settings for Business Card Copy.

(1) Specify the number of business cards to be copied and touch the [1-Sheet Layout] key or the [2-Sheet Layout] or the [8-Sheet Layout] key. (2) When [8-Sheet Layout] is selected, select the desired layout from "Layout".

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.

•To Business Card Copy setting:

Tap the [Off] key.

•To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

5

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

The zoom is fixed at 100%.

Copy results of 8-Sheet Layouts

Originals (Original orientation) Settings Results
1st A 5th E2nd B 6th F3rd C 7th G4th D 8th H
1st 2nd 3rd 4thA B C DD5th 6th 7th 8thE F G H

OTHER FUNCTIONS

OUTPUT AND LAYOUT EDITING FUNCTIONS

MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT (BOOKLET)

Copies made by "Booklet" can be folded at the centre to create a booklet.

This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.

Booklet copy using 8 original pages

Binding side

Left Binding Right Binding

• Booklet cannot be selected in easy mode. • To make Booklet copies of a book or other bound original, use the book copy function. COPYING A PAMPHLET (BOOK COPY) (page 3-63)
• When Booklet is selected, 2-sided copying mode is automatically selected. When settings are selected that prevent 2-sided copying, the booklet function cannot be used.
• Scan the originals in order from the first page to the last page. The order of copying will be automatically adjusted by the machine. Four original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper. Blank pages will be automatically produced at the end of pamphlet copies if the number of original pages is not a multiple of four.
• When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, you can select [Staple Sort] and set the Saddle Stitch (Staple each set of copies at two positions in the centre of paper). STAPLE SETTINGS (page 3-34)

To staple copies automatically when Booklet is enabled:

From the "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Condition Settings] → [Automatic Saddle Stitch].

This is used to activate Saddle Stitch automatically when Booklet is enabled when a saddle stitch finisher is installed. To make pamphlet copies without stapling when the [Automatic Saddle Stitch] option is ON, tap the [Staple Sort] key. Then, select [Booklet] and tap the [Off] key on the saddle stitch screen.

1

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

If the originals are 2-sided, place them in the document feeder tray.

2

Tap the [Others] key and then the [Booklet] key, or tap the [Staple Sort] key and then the [Saddle Stitch] key.

3

Select the binding edge.

To cancel the booklet setting:

Tap the [Off] key.

4

Tap the [1-Sided], [2-Sided Booklet] or [2-Sided Tablet] key as appropriate for the original.

When not inserting a cover, go to step 6.

5

When inserting a cover, tap the [Cover Setting] key, and tap the [On] key.

After the settings are completed, tap the [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.

To change the cover input tray:

Tap the [Paper Tray] key to display the tray selection screen.

Tap the cover input tray on the tray selection screen.

For more information, see "SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 3-13)".

- If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used.

•To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

6

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ON EACH BOOKLET PAGE (BOOKLET 2-Up/4-Up)

This function copies two or four original pages equally on one page of pamphlet copy paper.

This function is convenient for arranging a minimum number of copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet format.

• Booklet 2-Up/4-Up cannot be selected in easy mode.
• The following paper sizes and number of sheets are available for booklet 2-Up or 4-Up.

Paper size: A3W, A3, B4, A4R, B5R, 12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11"R

Number of stapled sheets: Max. 15 sheets

- Scan the originals in order from the first page to the last page. The order of copying will be automatically adjusted by the machine.

Eight or 16 original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper. Blank pages will be automatically produced at the end if the number of original pages is not a multiple of eight or 16.

1 Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

If the originals are 2-sided, place them in the document feeder tray.

2 Tap the [Staple Sort] key, and tap the [Saddle Stitch] key.

3 Select the binding edge.

To cancel the booklet setting:

Tap the [Off] key.

4

Tap the [1-Sided], [2-Sided Booklet] or [2-Sided Tablet] key as appropriate for the original.

When not inserting a cover, go to step 6.

5

When inserting a cover, tap the [Cover Setting] key, and tap the [On] key.

•To change the cover input tray:

Tap the [Paper Tray] key to display the tray selection screen.

Tap the cover input tray on the tray selection screen.

For more information, see "SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 3-13)".

• To make a copy on a cover sheet, check the [Make Copy on Cover (Duplex)] box so that ☑ appears.

- If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used.

•To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

6

Tap [N-Up] on the action panel.

7

Tap the key of the N-Up sheets you wish to use.

If needed, the images will be rotated.

To cancel the N-Up setting

Tap the [Off] key.

8

Select the layout.

9

Tap [Border], and select the border.

A line can be inserted between pages arranged on a sheet. After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key twice, and [Back] keys in sequence.

To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

10

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

COPYING A PAMPHLET (BOOK COPY)

This function makes a copy of the two facing pages of an open book or other bound document.

Copies made with this function can be folded at the centre to create a booklet.

This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.

Book copy flow (when the original has 4 pages)

Scan the original in the order of "cover and back cover" → "inside of cover and 1st page" → "2nd and 3rd page" → "4th page and inside of back cover" to copy.

• Book Copy cannot be selected in easy mode. • Book Copy must be specified before scanning the original. - Four original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper. Blank pages will be automatically added at the end if the total number of original pages is not a multiple of four. - This function can be combined with saddle stitch or fold if a saddle stitch finisher is installed. - When the book copy function is selected, 2-sided copying mode is automatically selected. When settings are selected that prevent 2-sided copying, the book copy function cannot be used.

Place the original on the document glass.

Place the opened pages of the "front and last sheets". DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

2

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Book Copy] key.

3

Select a binding position.

When not inserting a cover, tap the [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence. Then, go to step 5.

To cancel the book copy setting:

Tap the [Off] key.

4

When inserting a cover, tap the [Cover Setting] key, and tap the [On] key.

To make a copy on the inserted cover sheet, check the [Make Copy on Cover (Duplex)] box so that a checkmark appears. After the settings are completed, tap the [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.

To change the cover input tray:

Tap the [Paper Tray] key to display the tray selection screen. Tap the cover input tray on the tray selection screen. For more information, see "SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 3-13)".

• If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used.
• This setting is not available when the covers/inserts function is disabled in the setting mode.

5

Tap the [Start] key to scan the first original page.

Scanning of the original starts.

6

Place the next opened original pages, and tap the [Start] key.

Tap the same key you tapped in step 5. Repeat this step until all original pages have been scanned. Scan the remaining original pages in the following order: Inside of the front cover and the 1st page (facing pages), The 2nd and 3rd pages (facing pages), The last page and inside of back cover (facing pages).

• Copy settings cannot be changed when scanning additional pages. •To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

7

Tap the [Read-End] key to start copying.

SPLITTING A PAMPHLET ORIGINAL BY PAGE (BOOK DIVIDE)

This function splits a saddle-stitch original such as a catalogue or a pamphlet page by page, and copies in sequence.

• Book Divide cannot be selected in easy mode. • Book Divide must be specified before scanning the original. - This function supports three original binding edges: left binding, right binding, and top open. • The scanned original is split in the centre.

The document glass is not available for this function.

1

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Book Divide] key.

2

Select the binding edge of the pamphlet original.

Check the preview image displayed in the screen, and make sure that the binding edge is correct.

•To cancel the Book Divide setting:

Tap the [Off] key.

•To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

3

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

PAPER, AND TIME SAVING FUNCTIONS

SKIPPING BLANK PAGES IN AN ORIGINAL (BLANK PAGE SKIP)

If the scanned original contains blank pages, this function skips them to copy only non-blank pages. The machine detects blank pages, enabling you to skip useless copies without checking an original.

• If an original of which one side is blank is scanned, blank pages are skipped for 2-sided copying.
• Depending on the original, some pages that are not blank may be detected as blank pages and thus not being copied, and some pages that are blank may not be detected as blank and thus copied.

To use Blank Page Skip in Easy mode

In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Easy Mode Settings] → [Easy Copy].

1

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

2

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Blank Page Skip] key.

3

Tap the [Skip Blank Page] or [Skip Blank and Back Shadow] key.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.

To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

4

Tap the [Start] key.

5

Check the confirmation message, and tap the [OK] key to start copying.

On the confirmation screen, the number of scanned original sheets appears in (A), the number of scanned sides in (B), and the number of copies excluding blank pages in (C).

For example, if five original sheets that include two blank pages are scanned by duplex scanning, the result is displayed as follows:

5 pages of original have been scanned. (P.10)

Copy 8 pages of originals.

ADJUSTING THE BACKGROUND BY MAKING LIGHT AREAS OF THE ORIGINAL DARKER OR LIGHTER (BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT)

You can adjust the background by making light areas of the original darker or lighter.

Changing the level of [Background Adjustment] to the [+] side makes the background darker, while changing to the [-] side makes it lighter.

Darkness of the light area can be adjusted by this function.

• Background Adjustment cannot be selected in easy mode.
• You must select Background Adjustment before scanning the original.

1

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Background Adjustment] key.

2

Tap or move the slider to set the value.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.

To cancel the Background Adjustment setting: Tap the [Off] key.

3

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.

4

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

MAKING A PROOF COPY (PROOF COPY)

This function makes a proof copy before printing the specified number of copies. Check the preview image with a proof copy. If necessary, change the settings. Using this function stores the scanned original in the machine, saving you the trouble of re-scanning the original in the changed setting.

Proof copy flow

• Proof Copy cannot be selected in easy mode.
• Proof Copy must be specified before scanning the original.
• If Proof Copy is executed while the machine is printing another job, the job in progress is interrupted, and a proof copy is printed preferentially. The interrupted job will resume after proof copying has been completed.

However, if proof copy is executed during printing of a job for which both 2-sided printing and staple function are enabled, the proof copy will be printed after the job in progress is finished.

If the [Start Print] key is tapped to execute printing of the remaining sets while the machine is printing another job, the remaining sets will be printed after all previously reserved jobs are completed.

1

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Proof Copy] key.

A checkmark appears on the icon.

After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.

To cancel the Proof copy setting:

Tap the [Proof Copy] key to uncheck it.

2

As necessary, specify the required functions such as "Exposure" and "Copy Ratio".

3

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.

4

Set the number of copies (number of sets) using the numeric keys.

Up to 9999 copies (sets) can be set.

If an incorrect number of copies is set, tap the [C] key, and enter the correct number.

5

Tap the [Start] key. Make only one set of copies.

6

Check the copy result. If no problem is found, tap the [Start Print] key.

As necessary, change the settings and repeat proof copying until you are satisfied with the copy result.

You can also change the number of copies. To change the number of copies, use the numeric keys.

• In Proof Copy, unavailable function keys are not displayed.
• Some available functions may be restricted. •To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS (ORIGINAL COUNT)

This function counts the number of scanned original sheets, and displays the result before making a copy.

By allowing you to check the number of original sheets that were scanned, this helps reduce the occurrence of copy mistakes.

• Original count cannot be selected in easy mode.
• The count result is displayed with the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages. For example, when 2-sided copying is performed using one original, the number "1" will appear to indicate that one original sheet was scanned, not "2" to indicate the front-side page and the reverse side page.
• Original Count must be specified before scanning the original.

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Original Count] key.

A checkmark appears on the icon.

After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.

To cancel the Original Count setting:

Tap the [Original Count] key to uncheck it.

2 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

3

Tap the [Start] key.

4

Check the number of original sheets.

The number that is displayed is the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages. For example, when 2-sided copying is performed using one original, the number "1" will appear to indicate that one original sheet was scanned, not "2" to indicate the front-side page and the reverse side page.

If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of sheets

Tap the [Cancel] key to stop the job.

5

Tap the [OK] key to start copying.

If this function is combined with [Job Build], the count result is displayed after the [Read-End] key has been tapped.

USING TWO MACHINES TO REDUCE THE COPY TIME (TANDEM COPY)

This function shares a copy job half-and-half between two machines connected to the network, enabling the reduction of the copy time.

Primary unit and secondary unit

The primary unit performs only scanning, and a secondary unit registered in the primary unit performs only printing without scanning the original.

Network environment

• Tandem Copy cannot be selected in easy mode. • To use this function, two machines must be connected to your network. - Even if more machines are connected to the network, this function can only be used to have one other machine share a job. - To configure the tandem connection setting, register IP address information of the secondary unit in the primary unit. For the port number, it is best to use the initial setting (50001). Unless you experience difficulty with this setting, do not change the port number. The tandem setting should be configured by your network administrator. If the primary unit and secondary unit will switch roles, configure the IP address of the primary unit in the secondary unit. The same port number can be used for both machines. • In this situation:

A saddle stitch finisher is installed in the primary unit while not installed in a secondary unit.

• Tandem Copy is enabled when specifying copies without stapling.
• Tandem Copy is disabled when specifying copies with stapling.

As shown here, if Tandem Copy is enabled using a function provided in the primary unit and not provided in a secondary unit, a message will appear.

• If a machine runs out of paper

If either the primary unit or the secondary unit run out of paper, the machine that ran out of paper will hold the job while the machine that still has paper continues the job. When paper is added to the machine that ran out, the job resumes.

- If user authentication is specified

• Tandem Copy is enabled when user authentication is specified in the primary unit.
• Tandem Copy is disabled when user authentication is specified in the secondary unit while it is not specified in the primary unit.
• If an odd number of sets is being made, one more set is output to the primary unit.

1

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, change the original and tap the [Start] key. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

2

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Tandem Copy] key.

A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.

To cancel the Tandem Copy setting: Tap the [Tandem Copy] key to uncheck it.

3

Tap the number of copies key to specify the number of copies.

Up to 9999 copies (sets) can be set. The specified number of copies are shared between the primary unit and secondary unit. If the number of copies is odd, the primary unit makes more copies than the secondary unit.

- If an incorrect number of copies is set: Tap the [C] key and then enter the correct number. - To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.

4

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

To cancel Tandem Copy: Tap the [Cancel Copy] keys on both the primary unit and secondary unit.

SECURITY REINFORCEMENT FUNCTIONS

PADDING UNAUTHORISED COPY PREVENTION DATA (HIDDEN PATTERN PRINT)

Characters to prevent unauthorised copying such as pre-set or customized text are placed as invisible characters in a background pattern.

When an output sheet with a pattern print is copied, the hidden characters will appear.

• Hidden Pattern Print cannot be selected in easy mode.
• "Hidden Pattern Print" is a function provided for the purpose of deterring unauthorised copying. It does not guarantee the prevention of information leakage.
• Text may not be completely hidden on an output sheet with a hidden pattern print under certain machine conditions. In such a case, adjust the contrast by selecting the [Hidden Pattern Print Setting] from the "Settings (administrator)".
• When copying an output sheet with a hidden pattern print, the hidden pattern may not emerge depending on settings other than "Hidden Pattern Print".
• The hidden pattern may not emerge on copies with certain types of devices or under certain setting conditions used to copy an output sheet with a hidden pattern print.

1

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

2

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Hidden Pattern Print] key.

3

Tap the [On] key, and specify each item in the [Default Settings] tab as required.

We recommend you to select the [Positive] option for the "Method".

4

Specify each item in the [Print Contents Setting] tab as required.

To specify print settings, you can select the required one from pre-set text or use the soft keyboard. You can also print serial number and account job ID.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.

• Tapping the [Function Rev.] key displays the settings of the [Print Contents Setting] tab.
• The hidden pattern print preview may slightly differ from the actual pattern and exposure as the preview is used for simple pattern colour checking.

•To cancel the Hidden Pattern Print setting:

Tap the [Off] key.

•To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

5

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

OUTPUT POSITION AND MARGIN ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS

ADDING MARGINS (MARGIN SHIFT)

This function shifts the copy image right, left, or down to adjust the margin. This is convenient when you wish to bind the copies with a string or in a binder. Shifting the image to the right so the copies can be bound at the left edge.

Not using the Margin Shift / Using the Margin Shift

The punch holes cut off part of the image.	The image is moved to allow space for the holes so the image is not cut off.

Margin Shift

Right / Left

• Margin Shift cannot be selected in easy mode.
• Rotation copy cannot be used in combination with the margin shift function.

1

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

2

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Margin Shift] key.

3

Tap the image shift direction.

4

Sets a margin shift width.

Tap the numeric value display indicating the margin shift area on the front side or reverse side, and enter the area using the numeric keys.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.

If you set the [Adjust 2nd pg value to 1st.] checkbox to ☐, 📞 goes out and you can set sides 1 and 2 separately.

•To cancel the margin shift setting:

Tap the [Off] key.

•To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

5

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS FOR COPYING (ERASE)

The erase function is used to erase shadows around the edges of copies that occur when copying thick originals or books.

When a thick book is copied

Shadows appear here

Not using the Erase Using the Erase

Shadows appear on the copy Shadows do not appear on the copy

Erase modes (Outer Frame Erase, Centre Erase, Edge + Centre Erase, Side Erase)

Outer Frame Erase Centre Erase

Edge + Centre Erase Side Erase

• Erase cannot be selected in easy mode.
• If a ratio setting is used in combination with an erase setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio. If the erase width setting is 20mm (1") and the image is reduced to 50% , the erase width will be 10mm (1/2").
• This function erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form, but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows.
• When Erase is selected, the orientation of the original is automatically set to portrait.

1

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

2

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Erase] key.

3

Tap the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase, and specify the erase position.

Check that the tapped checkbox is set to √ If the [Outer Frame] key is tapped, the [Up], [Down], [Left], and [Right] checkboxes are set to √ If the [Specify Frame+Centre] key is tapped, all the checkboxes are set to √

Specify the erase edge on the reverse side when erasing edges of one to three sides of Up, Down, Left, and Right on the front side to scan a 2-sided original.

• If the [Reverse erase position of back face] checkbox is set to √, the edge in the position opposite to the erased edge on the front side will be erased.
• If the [Reverse erase position of back face] checkbox is set to □, the edge in the same position as on the front side will be erased.

4

Specify the erase width.

Tap the numeric value display indicating the erase width area on the front side or reverse side, and enter the area using the numeric keys.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.

To quickly set the area, first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys, then adjust it with - + .

•To cancel the erase setting:

Tap the [Clear] key.

•To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

5

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

COPYING ORIGINALS WITH NO EDGE CUT-OFF (FULL BLEED COPY)

This feature lets you copy an entire original to paper larger than the original size with no image cut-off at the edges.

• Full Bleed Copy cannot be selected in easy mode. • The punch function cannot be used.

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Full Bleed Copy] key.

"Select larger paper size than output image size of original." is displayed on the page.

Tap [OK] key.

When you have finished selecting other settings, tap the [Back] key.

To cancel the full bleed copy setting:

Tap the [Full Bleed Copy] key to uncheck it.

2 Place the original.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

2 Select paper larger than the output image.

SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 3-13)

SPECIFYING A TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER LOADED ON BYPASS TRAY (page 3-32)

To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

4 Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

COPYING IN THE CENTRE OF THE PAPER (CENTRING)

This function centres the copied image on the paper.

This lets you place the image in the centre of the paper when the original size is smaller than the paper size or when the image is reduced.

Not using the centring function Using the centring function

• Centring cannot be selected in easy mode.
• Centring must be specified before scanning the original.

• When the original size or the paper size is displayed as a special size, this function cannot be used.
• This function cannot be used in combination with an enlargement setting. If enlargement of 101% or more is selected, the enlargement is automatically returned to 100%.

1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Centring] key.

A checkmark appears on the icon.

After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.

•To cancel the centring setting:

Tap the [Centring] key to clear the checkmark.

•To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

2 Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

SPECIFYING A PAPER POSITION (POSITION IMAGE)

This function moves the scanned original to a specified position to make a copy.

You can make a copy in any desired position as you can fine adjust the position.

We recommend that you specify the top as the starting side of the original.

Position Image cannot be selected in easy mode.

1 Copy the original that you want to use for Move Copy.

Copying is performed without using move copy.

2 Measure the movement amount with the top as the starting side of the output copy.

3 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Position image] key.

Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. SPECIFYING THE ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26)

4

Sets a movement distance.

Tap the area indicating the movement distance on the front or reverse side, and enter the distance using numeric keys. After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.

• To quickly set the area, first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys, then adjust it with - If you set the [Adjust 2nd pg value to 1st.] checkbox to , goes out and you can set sides 1 and 2 separately. - If you want to copy in the horizontal orientation, specify "Left" as the starting side of the original. Even if you copied in the horizontal orientation, setting the starting side of the original to the top enables measurement of the movement distance in the same way as in the vertical orientation.

To cancel the Position Image setting:

Tap the [Clear] key.

5

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

6

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

SCANNING FUNCTIONS

COLLECTIVELY SCANNING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS (JOB BUILD)

This function divides the originals into sets and feeds each set through the automatic document feeder one set at a time when copying a very large number of originals.

This saves you the trouble of sorting the copies.

When scanning originals that are separated into sets, scan the set that has the first page first.

The individual copy settings can be configured for each set of originals to be scanned separately.

Up to 100 sets of originals can be scanned for one job.

• You must select Job Build mode before scanning the original.
• If you need to change all original settings, change them before scanning the original.
• If the Quick File Folder of document filing mode is full, copying in job build mode will be impeded. Delete unnecessary files from the Quick File Folder.

The Job Build mode cannot be combined with other functions.

• Dual Page Copy • Book Copy
• Card shot
• Multi-Page Enlargement
• Book Divide
• Repeat Layout

To use Job Build in Easy mode

In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Easy Mode Settings] → [Easy Copy].

Copying in job build mode

1

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Job Build] key.

A checkmark appears on the icon.

After the settings are completed, tap the [OK] key.

To cancel the job build setting

Tap the [Job Build] key to uncheck it.

2

Change settings as needed.

3

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Start] key to scan the first original.

Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray. Originals can be stacked up to the indicator line. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

4

Place the next set of originals and tap the [Start] key.

Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.

• To change copy settings for each set of originals, tap the [Change Setting] key. For more information, see "Changing the copy settings for each set of originals (page 3-90)".
• If you tap the [Preview] key, you cannot scan additional pages.

5

Repeat until all pages have been scanned and check the preview image in the preview screen.

To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

6

Tap the [Read-End] key to start copying.

Changing the copy settings for each set of originals

As necessary, change copy settings for each set of originals.

Perform the steps below before scanning the next set of originals in step 4 of "Copying in job build mode (page 3-88)".

A [Separator Page] setting cannot be changed for the second and later sets.

1 Tap the [Change Setting] key.

2 Change copy settings.

3 Place the next set of originals and tap the [Start] key. Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.

SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES (MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL)

This feature copies originals in different sizes at the same time even when B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size originals are mixed with A3 (11" x 17") size originals.

When scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the size of each original and uses paper appropriate for that size.

When mixed size original is combined with auto ratio selection, the ratio is adjusted individually for each original according to the selected paper size, enabling printing on a uniform paper size.

When mixed size original is combined with auto ratio selection

(When A3 (11" x 17") is selected with the auto ratio selection, B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size original is enlarged to A3 (11" x 17") size for printing.)

A B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size original is enlarged to A3 (11" x 17") size for printing.

There are two settings for mixed size originals.

Same Width

Use this setting for originals that are in 2 types of different sizes but have sides that are the same length.

The originals are inserted in the document feeder tray with the sides that are the same length aligned together on the left.

• A3 and A4 • B4 and B5 • A4R and A5 • 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 11" - 8-1/2" x 14" and 8-1/2" x 11"R • 8-1/2" x 14" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" • 8-1/2" x 13" and 8-1/2" x 11"R - 8-1/2" x 13" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" • 8-1/2" x 11" R and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

Different Width

Use this setting when the originals are in 2 types of different sizes and do not have sides that are the same length. This setting can only be used for the following combinations of sizes:

• A3 and B4 • A3 and B5 • B4 and A5 • A4 and B5 • B4 and A4R • B4 and A5 • B5 and A4R • B5 and A5 - 11"x17" and 8-1/2"x14" • 11"x17" and 8-1/2"x13" • 11"x17" and 5-1/2"x8-1/2"

Use this setting when the originals are in 3 types of different sizes and do not have sides that are the same length. This setting can only be used for the following combinations of sizes:

• A4R, B4, and A3 • A5, B4, and A3 • A4R, B5, and A3 • A5, B5, and A3 • A4R, A4, and B4 • A5, A4, and B4 • B5, A4R, and A4 • A5, B5, and A4 • B5R, A4R, and B4 • A5, B5R, and B4 • B5R, A4R, and B5 • A5, B5, and B5R

• Mixed Size Original cannot be selected in easy mode.
• Mixed Size Original must be specified before scanning the original.

• Three Different Widths cannot be selected on BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65.
• When [Different Width] is selected on the BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65, automatic two-sided scanning cannot be used.
• When [Different Width] is selected, the staple function cannot be used.

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Mixed Size Original] key.

Tap the [Same Width] key or the [Different Width] key as appropriate for the originals.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.

To cancel the mixed size original setting, tap the [Off] key.

Place the original face up on the document feeder tray with the corners aligned together in the far left corner.

Place the original as shown on the Mixed Size Original screen.

For mixed size originals, set "Original" to "Auto".

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

If the printed image is skewed when using the mixed size original function for originals of mixed width, open the document feeder cover, change the switch position, and then scan the originals.

Switch position A is used for normal scanning, and switch position B is used for mixed size original scanning. When you have finished using the mixed size original function, be sure to return the switch to position A.

SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS (SLOW SCAN MODE)

When you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder, you can use this function, which helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding.

• Slow Scan Mode cannot be selected in easy mode.
• Slow Scan Mode must be specified before scanning the original.

The "2-Sided→2-Sided" and "2-Sided→1-Sided" modes of automatic 2-sided copying cannot be used.

1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Slow Scan Mode] key.

A checkmark appears on the icon.

After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.

To cancel slow scan mode:

Tap the [Slow Scan Mode] key to clear the checkmark.

2 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed.

3 Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

On the BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65, when the document rolls in the original exit tray on the automatic document feeder, fix the paper fixing arm at the centre to the top.

SCANNING HEAVY ORIGINALS (HEAVY PAPER SCAN)

When you wish to scan heavy originals using the automatic document feeder, you can use this function, which helps prevent heavy originals from misfeeding.

• Heavy Paper Scan cannot be selected in easy mode.
• Heavy Paper Scan must be specified before scanning the original.
• Heavy Paper Scan cannot be selected on BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65.

1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Heavy Paper Scan] key.

A checkmark appears on the icon.

After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.

To cancel Heavy Paper Scan:

Tap the [Heavy Paper Scan] key to clear the checkmark.

2 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed.

3 Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

ADJUSTING RESOLUTION WHEN SCANNING (RESOLUTION)

This function adjusts the resolution when scanning the original, enabling high-quality output or speed-priority output according to the application.

• Resolution cannot be selected in easy mode.
• Resolution must be specified before scanning the original.
• The resolution setting is applied when making a full-size copy.

1

Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Scan Resolution] key.

2

Select the resolution.

The resolution can be set for both the document feeder and the document glass.

After the settings are completed, tap the [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.

On the BP-70M31/BP-70M36/BP-70M45/BP-70M55/BP-70M65, [600x300dpi] can be set.

3

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

4

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

TEXT AND IMAGE ADDITION FUNCTIONS

PRINTING DATES, PAGE NUMBERS, AND WATERMARKS (STAMP)

This function prints information such as the "Date" or "Stamp", which is not shown on the original, on copies. You can print the following six types of information.

• Date
• Page No.
• Stamp
• Copies
• Text
• Watermark

For the stamp or watermark, you can print text such as "CONFIDENTIAL" or "PRIORITY". You can print pre-set text or any characters as the text.

Each of the items above can be printed on the header or footer of each sheet.

• Stamp cannot be selected in easy mode.
• If the selected stamp content of one position overlaps the stamp content of another position, priority will be given in the following order: watermark, right side, left side, centre. Content that is hidden due to overlapping will not be printed.
• Text will be printed at the preset size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size setting.
• Text will be printed at the preset exposure regardless of the exposure setting.
• Depending on the size of the paper, some printed content may be cut off or shifted out of position.

Text Setting (Stamp) in Print menu

In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Text /Image Printing] → [Text Settings (Stamp)]

Register preset text to be used in [Stamp].

When [Stamp] is combined with other functions:

Combined function name	Print operation
Margin Shift	Together with the image, the stamp content is shifted the amount of the margin width.
Tab CopyCentring	Unlike a copy image that moves, the image will be printed in the position set in the stamp.
Dual Page CopyBook DivideCard Shot	Stamp items are printed for each copy sheet.
N-Up Stamp items are printed for each original page.
BookletBook Copy	Stamp items are printed for each page when compiling.
Covers/Inserts	Use the stamp settings to select whether or not the item is printed on inserted covers and inserts.

1

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

2

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Stamp] key.

3

Tap a tab to be printed, and tap the format.

The format of the [Text] tab can be entered using pre-set text or the soft keyboard. Setting using the [Text] tab (page 3-99)

When you tap the tab, the display tab is switched.

4

Tap a key of the desired print position.

Tap any of the [1] to [6] keys.

• Tapping the [Detail] key allows you to configure settings for each setting position.
• Tapping the [Layout] key allows you to check the printing position or detailed settings.

•To cancel the text settings: Tap the [Cancel All] key.

•To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.

5

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

Setting using the [Text] tab

Tap the [Direct Entry] key in the [Text] tab to display the soft keyboard. Use the soft keyboard to enter any characters.

Selecting the format from pre-set text

Tapping the [Pre-Set Text] key allows you to select the required one of the registered formats for printing. Tapping the [Store/Delete] key allows you to edit, delete, or store pre-set text.

ADDING A REGISTERED IMAGE TO AN ORIGINAL (CUSTOM IMAGE)

This function adds an image registered in the machine to an original to make a copy.

Following are two types of custom images.

- Custom stamp (Stamp image)

- Custom watermark (Stamp image with grey-scale watermark)

- The combination with other functions is described in the table below.

Combined function Custom image operations
Margin Shift Shifts in the same way as for an original image.
Erase Makes a stamp copy as normal.
Dual Page Copy Makes a stamp copy by sheet.
Booklet Makes a stamp copy as normal.
Job Build Makes a stamp copy as normal.
Tandem Copy Based on the tandem copy.
Covers/Inserts Based on the custom image setting.
Separator Page Printing does not take place on separator pages.
Transparency Inserts Makes a stamp copy as normal.
N-Up Makes a stamp copy by sheet.
Book Copy Makes a stamp copy as normal.
Tab Copy Makes a stamp copy as normal regardless of image shift setting.
Card Shot Makes a stamp copy by sheet.
Business Card Copy	Makes Business Card Copy by sheet.
Mirror Image	Makes a stamp copy as normal without mirror image reverse.
B/W Reverse	Prints an image as normal without B/W reverse. However, the following condition is set when printed on a dark background.Custom stamp: Printed in whiteCustom watermark: Printed without being whitened
Full Bleed Copy Makes a stamp copy as normal.
Centring Makes a stamp copy as normal without centring.
Stamp Makes a stamp copy on the Stamp menu.
Photo Repeat Cannot be combined.
Multi-Page Enlargement Cannot be combined.
Hidden Pattern Print Makes a stamp copy under a pattern print.
Tracking Information Print Makes a stamp copy under a tracking information print.
Repeat Layout Cannot be combined.
Position Image	Prints an image at the original position regardless of the Position Image setting.
Book Divide Makes a stamp copy by sheet.

• Custom Image cannot be selected in easy mode.
• An image must be registered in advance from the printer driver to the machine. REGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGE (page 4-53)
• A custom stamp image is copied by sheet, not by original. If N-Up is enabled, user stamps are copied for each set of pages.
• A custom stamp image is copied with the registered size. The size remains unchanged even when the copy ratio is enlarged or reduced.
• A different custom image cannot be specified for each page.
• If an image runs off of the specified paper depending on the registered size or position, the excess will not be copied.
• Custom Image can be combined with Tandem Copy. Stamp copy is performed when a custom image with the same file name is registered in both the primary unit and secondary unit. If it is not registered, a copy will be made without a custom image.

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Custom Image] key.

3 Tap the [Custom Stamp] of [Custom Watermark] key:

Tap the [Image] key to select an image.

Select the required thumbnail image(s) from the available selection.

5

Set [Print Page] or [Print Position].

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.

•To cancel the custom image setting:

Tap the [Off] key.

•To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

6

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

For settings related to custom stamp and custom watermark, see the following table.

For custom stamp

Print Page Specify a page(s) for stamp copy. First Page or All Pages
Print Position Specify a position for stamp copy.
Print Angle	Specify the corner of the image. 0 degrees, -90 degrees, 90 degrees, or 180 degrees

For custom watermark

Print Pattern Specify the image	watermark print pattern. Transparent: Makes an original image transparent for stamp copy. Overlap: Hides a watermark added to an original image for stamp copy.
Exposure Select the exposure	of a watermark from nine levels.
Print Page Specify a page(s)	for stamp copy. First Page or All Pages
Print Position Specify a position for stamp copy.
Print Angle	Specify the corner of the image. 0 degrees, -90 degrees, 90 degrees, or 180 degrees

INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS)

This function inserts a different type of paper into the pages corresponding to the front and back covers of a copy job. It is helpful when you want to change cover paper to make resources look better.

Configure insertion sheet settings if needed.

• To insert insertion sheets, see "INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS) (page 3-111)".
• For N-Up, the layout is based on the first page and excludes covers.

Copying on a front cover and inserting together with a back cover

A different type of paper is inserted as a front cover, and a back cover is inserted to the last of the copy job.

Front cover paper Back cover paper Copy

Cover inserting examples

The following shows the copy results when front and back covers are inserted into six 1-sided original pages or three 2-sided original pages in the four copy modes below.

1-sided copying of 1-sided originals

Setting conditions for each cover		Resulting copies
Front Cover Back Cover
Not copied Not copied
		Inserts cover sheets at the beginning and end of copies.
1-sided copy Not copied
		Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end of copies.
2-sided copy Not copied
		Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end of copies.

Setting conditions for each cover		Resulting copies
Front Cover Back Cover
Not copied 1-sided copy		Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover.
Not copied 2-sided copy		Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover.
1-sided copy 1-sided copy		Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover.
1-sided copy 2-sided copy		Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover.
2-sided copy 1-sided copy		Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover.
2-sided copy 2-sided copy		Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover.

2-sided copying of 1-sided originals

Setting conditions for each cover		Resulting copies
Front Cover	Back Cover
Not copied Not copied		Inserts cover sheets at the beginning and end of copies.
1-sided copy Not copied		Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page. Inserts cover sheets at the end of copies.
2-sided copy Not copied		Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end of copies.
Not copied 1-sided copy		Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. A 1-sided copy is made on the fifth original page.
Not copied 2-sided copy		Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover.
1-sided copy 1-sided copy		Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover.
1-sided copy 2-sided copy		Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover.
2-sided copy 1-sided copy		Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. A 1-sided copy is made on the fifth original page.
2-sided copy 2-sided copy		Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover.

1-sided copying of 2-sided originals

Setting conditions for each cover		Resulting copies
Front Cover	Back Cover
Not copied Not copied			1	2	3 4 5		6
			Inserts cover sheets at the beginning and end of copies.
1-sided copy Not copied			2 3 45				6
			Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end of copies.
2-sided copy Not copied
			Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end of copies.
Not copied 1-sided copy			1	2	3 4 5
			Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover.
Not copied 2-sided copy
			Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover.
1-sided copy 1-sided copy		Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover.
1-sided copy 2-sided copy		Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover.
2-sided copy 1-sided copy		Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover.
2-sided copy 2-sided copy		Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover.

2-sided copying of 2-sided originals

Setting conditions for each cover		Resulting copies
Front Cover	Back Cover
Not copied Not copied		Inserts cover sheets at the beginning and end of copies.
1-sided copy Not copied		Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end of copies.*The second original page is not copied.
2-sided copy Not copied		Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end of copies.
Not copied 1-sided copy		Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover.* The fifth original page is not copied.
Not copied 2-sided copy		Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover.
1-sided copy 1-sided copy		Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. The second and the fifth original pages are not copied.
1-sided copy 2-sided copy		Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover.* The second original page is not copied.
2-sided copy 1-sided copy		Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover.* The fifth original page is not copied.
2-sided copy 2-sided copy		Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover.

• Covers/Inserts cannot be selected in easy mode.
• Before using the covers/inserts function, load insertion sheets in the tray.
• When selecting the covers/inserts function, place the originals in the document feeder tray, select 1-sided or 2-sided copying, and select the number of copies and any other desired copy settings. When these settings have been completed, perform the procedure to select covers/inserts.
• One sheet can be inserted for each of front and back covers.

• When performing 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals, an insertion sheet cannot be inserted between the front and reverse sides of an original.
• This function cannot be used in combination with the saddle stitch function.

1

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

2

Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Covers/Inserts] key.

3

Tap the [Front Cover] key, and then tap the [On] key.

When inserting a back cover, tap the [Back Cover] tab, and then tap the [On] key.

4

Tap the [Change] key.

5

Configure copy setting of a front cover sheet.

When only inserting a cover, tap the [Make No Copy] key. If you selected the [2-Sided Copy] key, tap the [Book] or [Tablet] key for the front cover binding.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

To change the cover input tray:

Tap the [Paper Tray Settings] key to display the input tray setting screen. On the input tray setting screen, tap the [Paper Tray] key of [Front Cover] or [Back Cover].

For more information, see "SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 3-13)".

• If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used. If not copied on, tab paper can be inserted. •To cancel cover sheet insertion:

Tap the [Off] key.

• To cancel the front cover, back cover, and insertion sheet settings at the same time: Tap the [Cancel All] key. •To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

6

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS)

This function inserts a sheet of paper into a specific page as an insertion sheet.

There are two types of insertion sheets. Insertion positions can be specified.

Insert covers if needed.

When inserting covers, see "INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS) (page 3-103)".

Example: Inserting sheets after pages 3 and 5

Sheet inserting examples

The following examples show the copy results when insertion sheets are inserted into six 1-sided originals or three 2-sided originals using two copy modes.

1-sided original copying

Insertion sheet setting conditions	Resulting copies
	Insert an insertion sheet in 1-sided copy mode. Insert an insertion sheet in 2-sided copy mode.
Not copied	Inserts an insertion sheet between the second and third pages of copies.
1-sided copy	Makes a 1-sided copy of the third original page on an insertion sheet.
2-sided copy	Makes a 2-sided copy of the third and fourth original pages on an insertion sheet.

2-sided original copying

Insertion sheet setting conditions	Resulting copies
	Insert an insertion sheet in 1-sided copy mode.	Insert an insertion sheet in 2-sided copy mode.
Not copied	Inserts an insertion sheet between the second and third pages of copies.
1-sided copy	Makes a 1-sided copy of the third original page on an insertion sheet.	* The fourth original page is not copied.
2-sided copy	Makes a 2-sided copy of the third and fourth original pages on an insertion sheet.

• Covers/Inserts cannot be selected in easy mode.
• Before using the covers/inserts function, load insertion sheets in the tray.
• When selecting the covers/inserts function, place the originals in the document feeder tray, select 1-sided or 2-sided copying, and select the number of copies and any other desired copy settings. When these settings have been completed, perform the procedure to select covers/inserts.
• The insertion sheet size must be the same as the copy size.
• Up to 100 insertion sheets can be inserted.

• The document glass is not available for this function. • Take care that two insertion sheets cannot be inserted into the same page. - When performing 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals, an insertion sheet cannot be inserted between the front and reverse sides of an original. - This function cannot be used in combination with the saddle stitch function.

1

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

2

Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Covers/Inserts] key.

3

Tap the [Insertion Sheet] tab.

4

Tap the [Insertion Type A] key, and tap the insert page display key.

The Insertion Type B to Type H settings are the same as the Insertion Type A settings.

5

Enter the number of the page you want to insert a sheet into using numeric keys, and then tap the [Enter] key.

The total number of insertion sheets is displayed at the side of [Enter] key. Repeat these steps for the number of insertion sheets.

After the settings are completed, tap the [OK] key.

- If you have entered an incorrect insert page number:

Tap the [Page Layout] key and change the page.

CHECKING, EDITING, AND DELETING THE PAGE LAYOUT OF COVERS AND INSERTION SHEETS (PAGE LAYOUT) (page 3-115)

• To cancel insertion sheets:

Tap the [Cancel All] key.

6

Tap the [Change] key.

7

When only inserting insertion sheet A, tap the [Make No Copy] key.

When making a copy on insertion sheet A, tap the [Simplex] or [2-Sided Copy] key.

If you selected [2-Sided Copy], tap the [Book] key or [Tablet] key for the insert sheet binding.

After the settings are completed, tap the [OK] key.

• To change an insertion sheet:

Tap the [Paper Tray] key, and select the tray with insertion sheets loaded.

• To copy on tab paper, tap the [Tab Copy] key.

COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER (TAB COPY) (page 3-118)

- When copying on both sides of an insertion sheet, you cannot use label sheets, transparency films, or tab paper for insertion. If not copied on, tab paper can be inserted.

• To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

8

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

CHECKING, EDITING, AND DELETING THE PAGE LAYOUT OF COVERS AND INSERTION SHEETS (PAGE LAYOUT)

The editing contents are different between the registered covers and insertion sheets as shown below.

• For the "Cover Sheet", you can change settings such as the paper type, copy/do not copy, 1-Sided, and 2-Sided.
• For "Insert Sheet", you can change only the page number you want to insert an insert sheet into.

1

Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Covers/Inserts] key.

2

Tap the [Page Layout] key.

If the settings for the covers or insertion sheets are not configured, the [Page Layout] key is disabled.

3

Check the page layout.

To exit this job after checking the page layout, tap the [OK] key.

To edit or delete, tap the required key. When deleting, tap the [Delete] key.

When editing, tap the [Amend] key.

When setting consecutive insertion of different types of inserts at the same page, you can tap [Replace Order of Inserts] on the action panel to change the order.

4

Change cover or insertion sheet settings.

For the cover, you can change the copy mode.

You can change the page number you want to insert an insert sheet into.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN BETWEEN TRANSPARENCY FILMS (TRANSPARENCY INSERTS)

When copying on transparency film, the sheets may stick together due to static electricity.

The transparency inserts function can be used to automatically insert a sheet of paper between each sheet of transparency film, making the sheets easy to handle.

It is also possible to copy on insertion sheets.

• Transparency Inserts cannot be selected in easy mode.
• When performing 2-sided copying, only "2-Sided→1-Sided" mode can be used.

• The number of copies cannot be selected in this mode.
• Transparency film must be loaded in the bypass tray.

Place the transparency film face down in the bypass tray, and load transparency film sheets.

After loading the transparency film, configure the bypass tray settings. MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY (page 3-31)

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Transparency Inserts] key.

4

Tap the [On] key.

When making a copy on insertion sheets, tap the [Also Make

Copy on Inserts] checkbox to set to

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

•To cancel the transparency inserts setting:

Tap the [Off] key.

•To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

5

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIFIC USES

COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER (TAB COPY)

Load a tab sheet in the bypass tray, and make a copy on a tab.

Prepare originals for captions that match the tab positions.

The image is shifted by the width of the tab.

Relation between the originals and the tab paper

Tab copying with a left binding

Originals Placing the originals Loading tab paper
OriginalsFinal image	Document feeder trayInsert the originals so that the side with no tab text enters first.	Load the tab paper so that the tab on the first sheet is toward you.
	Document glassPlace so that the side with the tab text is on the left.

Tab copying with a right binding

Originals Placing the originals Loading tab paper
OriginalsFinal image	Document feeder trayInsert the originals so that the side with no tab text enters first.	Load the tab paper so that the tab on the first sheet is away from you.
	Document glassPlace so that the side with the tab text is on the left.

• Tab Copy cannot be selected in easy mode.
• Tab Copy must be specified before scanning the original.

1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Tab Copy] key.

2 Tap the [On] key.

3

Sets an image shift width (tab width).

• Tap the numeric value display indicating the image shift width, and enter a shift width using numeric keys. • After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.

To cancel the tab copy setting:

Tap the [Off] key.

4

Load the tab paper.

When using the bypass tray, place the paper with the print side down.

Place the paper so that the sides with the tabs enter the machine last.

After loading tab paper into the bypass tray, configure the bypass tray settings as explained in "MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY (page 3-31)".

Tab copying with a left binding

Place the tab paper with the side 2 facing up, and the tab on the first sheet is on the near side.

Tab copying with a right binding

Place the tab paper with side 2 facing up, and the tab on the first sheet is on the back side.

The width of the tab paper can be as wide as A4 width (210 mm) plus 20 mm (or 8-1/2" x 11" paper (8-1/2") plus 5/8").

5

Place the original and tap the [Preview] key.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

6

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

MAKING A POSTER-SIZED COPY (MULTI-PAGE ENLARGEMENT)

This function separately copies an enlarged original image on multiple sheets.

For example, an A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size original can be enlarged on 8 sheets of A3 (11" x 17") paper.

• Multi-Page Enlargement cannot be selected in easy mode.
• You must select Multi-Page Enlargement before scanning the original.
• Place an original on the document glass.
• When Multi-Page Enlargement is selected, the image orientation is changed to vertical. • Overlap of sections of image
• There will be a margin around the edges of each copy.
• Areas for overlapping the copies will be created at the leading and trailing edges of each copy.
• The paper size, number of sheets required for the enlarged image, and the ratio are automatically selected based on the selected original size and enlargement size. (The paper size and ratio cannot be selected manually.)

1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Multi-Page Enlargement] key.

2 Select the [AB] or [inch] tab to meet the original size for poster-sized copy, and tap the key that meets the original size.

Tapping the key of the original size displays the keys that show the available enlargement size, copy paper size, and number of sheets.

3

Tap the key of the size you want to enlarge the original to.

The image orientation appears.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

When printing the copy image and margin border, set the [Print Paste Position Mark] checkbox to √.

•To cancel Multi-Page Enlargement setting:

Tap the [Clear] key.

Even when the multi-page enlargement setting is cancelled, the automatically selected ratio is retained.

•To return the ratio to 100%:

Tap the [Copy Ratio] key on the base screen to display the ratio menu, and then tap the [100%] key.

4

Place the original on the document glass based on the orientation displayed on the screen.

5

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

COPYING WITH MIRROR IMAGE (MIRROR IMAGE)

This function makes copies by inverting the original into a mirror image.

• Mirror Image cannot be selected in easy mode.
• Specify the Mirror Image before scanning an original.

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Mirror Image] key.

A checkmark appears on the icon.

After the settings are completed, tap the [OK] key.

To cancel the mirror image setting:

Tap the [Mirror Image] key to uncheck it.

2 Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

3 Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

OUTPUT AND DENSITY ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS

REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A COPY (B/W REVERSE)

This function reverses black and white in a copy to create a negative image.

Originals with large black areas (which use a large amount of toner) can be copied using Black/White Reverse to reduce toner consumption.

• B/W Reverse cannot be selected in easy mode.
• B/W Reverse must be specified before scanning the original.
• When this function is selected, the "Exposure/Original Type" setting for exposure adjustment automatically changes to "Text".
• This function is not available in some countries and regions.

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [B/W Reverse] key.

A checkmark appears on the icon.

After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.

To cancel the B/W reverse setting:

Tap the [B/W Reverse] key to uncheck it.

2 Place the original in the doc

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

3

EASY ADJUSTMENT OF THE IMAGE QUALITY (QUICK IMAGE QUALITY ADJUSTMENT)

You can easily adjust the outlines of images and text.

• Quick Image Quality Adjustment cannot be selected in easy mode.
• You must select Quick Image Quality Adjustment before scanning the original.

1

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Quick Image Quality Adjustment] key.

2

Tap or slide the slider to adjust the image quality.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

To cancel the quick image quality adjustment setting:

Tap the [Off] key.

3

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

4

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE (SHARPNESS)

This function adjusts the sharpness to make a sharper or softer image.

• Sharpness cannot be selected in easy mode.
• Sharpness must be specified before scanning the original.

1

Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Sharpness] key.

2

Tap or slide the slider to adjust the sharpness.

Select [More Sharp] for sharper outlines, or [Less Sharp] for softer outlines.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

To cancel the sharpness setting:

Tap the [Off] key.

3

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

To cancel all settings:

Tap the [CA] key.

4

Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying.

THE ADJUST DENSITY AREA FOR COPY (GREY BALANCE)

You can adjust the tone, and density of copies.

The density is divided into three ranges, and you can adjust the density of each range.

If needed, you can also adjust all three density ranges at once.

Black+

• Grey Balance cannot be selected in easy mode.
• Grey balance must be specified before scanning the original.

1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Grey Balance] key.

2

Tap the key or slide the slider to adjust the grey balance.

• To adjust each range, select the [Set in a Batch] checkbox.
• To adjust a slider individually with the keys, tap the slider you want to adjust and then tap the keys.
• After the settings are completed, tap the [OK] key.

To return the grey balance of the current tab to the default balance:

Tap the [Reset] key.

The values of all gradations currently being adjusted will return to their default colour balance values.

3

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

4

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS

INTERRUPT COPY

This function suspends a job in progress, and preferentially prints the original specified with interrupt copy.

When you need to make an urgent copy and the machine is busy with a long copy run or other job, use interrupt copy.

• The [Interrupt] key does not appear while an original is being scanned.
• Depending on the settings of the job in progress, the [Interrupt] key may not appear.
• Interrupt copy cannot be used in combination with the following functions: Job Build, Tandem Copy, Book Copy, Card Shot, Multi-Page Enlargement, Original Count, Proof Copy, Preview Setting, and Book Divide.
• If you use the document glass for interrupt copy, you cannot select the booklet, covers/inserts function, or N-Up setting. If any of these functions are necessary, use the automatic document feeder.

1

Tap the [Interrupt] key.

The interrupt mode screen appears.

If user authentication is specified:

Tap the [Interrupt] key to display the user authentication screen. Enter the login name and password to perform user authentication.

2

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30)

3

Configure copy settings.

To cancel interrupt copy, tap the [Cancel] key.

4

Tap the [Start] key to start interrupt copying.

When the interrupt copy job is completed, the interrupted job will resume.

The interrupt copy function does not display the preview of the scanned original.

SEND DATA WHILE COPYING

This function allows you to send a fax while making a copy, send an e-mail with an image attached, or save data in the network folder.

You need to store the destination in the address book in advance. STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY (page 6-19)

The fax and image send transmission starts after the copy, and the settings same as the copy are used for transmission. However, the same results as the copy may not be provided by some functions.

1

Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.

EASY MODE (page 3-3)

2

Tap [Send as well as print] on the action panel.

3

Select a recipient from the address book.

SELECTING "Contacts" OR "Group" (page 6-16)

After you have selected the recipient, tap the [Enter Address] key.

• You cannot use the soft keyboard to enter an address. If you cannot find the recipient in the address book, enter it in the address book.
• An Internet Fax address cannot be selected.

4

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-30) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-35)

5

Set each copy item as required.

These copy settings are used for fax transmission. However, some settings may be unavailable depending on the function.

You can preview the scanned original by tapping the [Preview] key.

6

Tap the [Start] key to start copying.

After the copy, the transmission starts.

After the copy, you cannot preview the settings before transmission.

COPY JOBS

When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To check the status of a copy job, tap the [Print] tab. When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing, read "STOPPING/DELETING A JOB, PRIORITY PROCESSING AND CHECKING THE STATUS (page 2-53)".

PROGRAMS

Programs are set from the base screen of normal mode.

EASY MODE (page 3-3)

Programs cannot be stored in easy mode.

STORING A PROGRAM

This function collectively stores copy settings as one program. The stored program can be retrieved using an easy operation.

For information about how to retrieve a program, see "RETRIEVING A PROGRAM (page 3-133)".

For example, suppose A3 (11" x 17") size CAD drawings are copied once a month for archive purposes using the following settings:

• The A3 (11" x 17") size CAD drawings are reduced to A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size.
• To reduce paper use by half, 2-sided copying is used.
• Margin shift is used to allow a margin to punch holes for filing.

A3 (11" x 17") size CAD drawings

When a job program is not stored When a job program is stored
Set reduction from A3 (11" x 17") to A4 (8-1/2" x 11")Change the exposure setting.[XYZC]Set 2-sided copying.Set margins.Set punch hole settings.Tap the [Start] key.	Retrieve the stored program.Tap the [Start] key.
Considerable time is required to copy the drawings each month because the above settings must be selected.In addition, mistakes are occasionally made when selecting the settings, so some copies must be redone.	The settings are stored in a program, so they can be selected by the touch of a key. This is simple and takes no time.In addition, the settings are all stored so there are no chances for mistakes, and thus no need to redo copies due to setting mistakes.

• Up to 48 programs can be stored.
• Program settings remain registered even when the main power has been turned off.
• A program can also be stored in the home screen or favorite as a shortcut; therefore, it is helpful when retrieving it.

1

Specify the copy function to be stored.

In the base screen, display [Program Registration] on the action panel.

2

Tap [Program Registration] on the action panel.

3

Tap an unused key.

A key with a program stored is displayed in color.

Tap a key with no program stored.

If you do not set a name for the program, a serial number will be automatically assigned as the name.

4

Set a name for the program and tap the [OK] key.

A registration completion message appears.

5

Select whether or not the program will be added to the home screen or the favourites.

To specify print settings, you can select the required one from pre-set text or use the soft keyboard. You can also print serial number and account job ID. When you have completed the settings, tap [OK] and the [Back] keys in sequence.

• If user authentication is enabled, the shortcut key for the program is registered in the user's home screen or favourite.
• If user authentication is disabled, the administrator password entry screen appears. When the administrator password is entered, the registration is completed. • The number of copies cannot be stored.

RETRIEVING A PROGRAM

1

Tap [Call Program] on the action panel.

2

Tap the key of the program you want to retrieve.

You can tap [Register in Favourite] or [Register for Home] on the action panel to register a shortcut key for the selected program in the favourite or home screen.

DELETING AND RENAMING A PROGRAM

This section explains how to delete copy settings in a program and rename a program.

A program that is already stored cannot be deleted.

Deleting a program

1

Tap [Call Program] on the action panel.

2

Tap [Delete] on the action panel.

3

Tap the key of the program you want to delete, and tap [Delete].

Renaming a program

1

Tap [Call Program] on the action panel.

2

Tap [Change Name] on the action panel.

Tap the key of the required program, and rename the program. Then tap the [OK] key.

After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.

PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE

PRINTER FUNCTION 4-3

WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT 4-3

macOS ENVIRONMENT 4-3

PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT

BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE 4-4

PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS SCREEN / REFERRING TO HELP 4-6 SELECTING THE PAPER 4-7 PRINTING ON ENVELOPES 4-8

PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION

FUNCTION IS ENABLED 4-9

FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS ..... 4-11

SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF PRINTING . . . 4-11

USING SAVED SETTINGS 4-12

CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER DEFAULT SETTINGS 4-13

SHARE FAVORITE SETTINGS BETWEEN SERVER AND CLIENT 4-14

PRINTING IN A macOS ENVIRONMENT

BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE 4-15

SELECTING THE PAPER 4-16

PRINTING ON ENVELOPES 4-17

PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION

FUNCTION IS ENABLED 4-18

FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS

SELECTING THE RESOLUTION 4-20

2-SIDED PRINTING....4-21

FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER. . . . . . . 4-23

PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE.....4-25

PRINTING WHILE SKIPPING BLANK PAGES ..... 4-27

STAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN

OUTPUT....4-28

STAPLE FUNCTION 4-28

PUNCH FUNCTION 4-28

CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS

CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING

PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS....4-31

CREATE A PAMPHLET (BOOKLET/SADDLE STITCH) 4-31

PRINTING WITH MARGIN SHIFT SETTING (MARGIN) 4-33

CREATE A LARGE POSTER (POSTER PRINTING) 4-35

FUNCTIONS TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND

ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE .....4-36

ADJUST PRINT POSITION ON ODD AND EVEN PAGES SEPARATELY (PRINT POSITION)....4-36

ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES (ROTATE 180 DEGREES)....4-37

ENLARGING/REDUCING THE PRINT IMAGE (ZOOM SETTING/ENLARGE OR REDUCE)....4-38

ADJUST THE LINE THICKNESS (WIDTH).....4-40

PRINT A MIRROR-IMAGE (MIRROR-IMAGE REVERSE/VISUAL EFFECTS). 4-45

IMAGE MODE ADJUSTING FUNCTION....4-46

ADJUST THE BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST OF THE IMAGE (IMAGE ADJUSTMENT). 4-46

PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN BLACK (TEXT TO BLACK/VECTOR TO BLACK). 4-47

SELECTING IMAGE SETTINGS TO MATCH THE IMAGE TYPE 4-48

FUNCTIONS TO COMBINE TEXT AND IMAGES.....4-50

ADDING A WATERMARK TO PRINTED PAGES (WATERMARK)....4-50

PRINTING AN IMAGE OVER THE PRINT DATA (IMAGE STAMP). 4-52

REGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGE .....4-53

OVERLAY A FIXED FORM ON THE PRINT DATA (OVERLAYS). 4-54

ADDING THE NUMBER OF COPIES (COPIES STAMP). 4-56

PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL PURPOSES.....4-57

PRINTING SPECIFIC PAGES ON DIFFERENT PAPER (DIFFERENT PAPER)....4-57

ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON TRANSPARENCY FILM (TRANSPARENCY INSERTS) 4-60

INSERTING SEPARATOR PAGES BETWEEN JOBS OR COPIES 4-62

PRINTING A CARBON COPY (CARBON COPY) .....4-63

PRINTING TEXT ON TABS OF TAB PAPER (TAB SHIFT/TAB PAPER PRINT)....4-64

TWO-SIDED PRINTING WITH SPECIFIC PAGES PRINTED ON THE FRONT SIDE (CHAPTER INSERTS)....4-67

FOLDING PAPER FOR PRINTING (FOLD) .....4-68

INSERT PRESET DATA BEFORE OR AFTER EACH

PAGE (PAGE INTERLEAVE)....4-73

PRINT THE SAME IMAGE IN TILE PATTERN (REPEAT PRINT)....4-74

PRINTING PATTERN DATA (HIDDEN PATTERN PRINT) 4-75

CHANGING THE RENDERING METHOD AND PRINTING JPEG IMAGES (USE DRIVER TO RENDER JPEGS) 4-77

MAXIMIZING THE PRINT AREA ON THE PAPER (PRINT AREA) 4-78

CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS....4-79

USING TWO MACHINES TO PRINT A LARGE PRINT JOB (TANDEM PRINT) 4-79

SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES (DOCUMENT FILING)....4-81

AUTOMATICALLY PRINT ALL STORED DATA ..... 4-84

PRINTING AND SENDING SIMULTANEOUSLY.....4-85

PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER

EXTENSION OF PRINTABLE FILES 4-86

DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON AN FTP SERVER ... 4-86

DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN USB MEMORY ..... 4-88

DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN A NETWORK

FOLDER 4-89

PRINTING A FILE IN THE NETWORK FOLDER YOU HAVE CONFIGURED IN THE MACHINE'S SETTINGS 4-90

DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM A COMPUTER ..... 4-93

SUBMIT PRINT JOB 4-93

FTP PRINT....4-94

E-MAIL PRINT 4-94

Universal Print 4-96

BEFORE CONNECTING THE Universal Print SERVICE 4-96

Universal Print Settings 4-97

Registering the machine with Azure Active Directory 4-97

Registering the machine with each client PC ..... 4-97

Delete from Azure Active Directory 4-97

PRINTER JOBS

CHECKING THE PRINT STATUS 4-98

PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE .....4-98

CHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND

PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUT 4-99

PRINT RELEASE FUNCTION

PRINT RELEASE FUNCTION .....4-100

INTER-GROUP PRINTING. 4-100

BEFORE USING THE PRINT RELEASE

FUNCTION 4-101

Settings required on the machine .....4-101

Installing the printer driver of the primary unit ..... 4-101

USING THE PRINT RELEASE FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . 4-102

Storing a job in the primary unit from your computer....4-102

Printing/deleting a job stored in the primary unit from a secondary unit. 4-104

APPENDIX

PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS LIST ..... 4-105

SPECIFYING A BILLING CODE USING THE PRINTER

DRIVER 4-109

Enable billing code 4-109

AUTHENTICATION BY SINGLE SIGN-ON.....4-111

Settings 4-111

PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE

PRINTER FUNCTION

To enable printing from your computer, a printer driver must be installed.

See the table below to determine which printer driver to use in your environment.

WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT

Printer driver type

PCL6

The machine supports the Hewlett-Packard PCL6 printer control languages.

PS (On the BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65, the PS3 expansion kit is required.)

- This printer driver supports the PostScript 3 page description language developed by Adobe.

- If it is desired to use the Windows standard PS printer driver, the PPD driver must be used.

• To install the printer driver and configure settings in a Windows environment, see the Software Setup Guide. - The User's Manual mainly uses PCL6 printer driver screens to explain how to print in a Windows environment. The printer driver screens may differ slightly depending on the printer driver you are using.

macOS ENVIRONMENT

Printer driver type

PS (On the BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65, the PS3 expansion kit is required.)

PS This printer driver supports the PostScript 3 page description language developed by Adobe and uses a PPD file.

• To install the printer driver and configure settings in a macOS environment, see the Software Setup Guide.
• The explanations of screens and procedures for use in a macOS environment generally assume that macOS 11 is being used and a PPD driver is installed. The screens may be different depending on the version of the operating system or the software application.

If a notice page is printed

If a print job cannot be printed as specified and the reason is not shown on the operation panel, a notice page indicating the reason will print. Read the message and take appropriate action. For example, a notice page will print if the following occurs:

• There is more print data than can be held in memory.
• You selected a function that has been prohibited by the administrator.

PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT

BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE

The following example explains how to print a document from "WordPad", which is a standard accessory application in Windows.

• The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application.
• The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Preferences]) may vary depending on the application.
• The machine name that normally appears in the [Printer] menu is [BP-xxxxx]. ("xxxxx" is a sequence of characters that varies depending on the machine model.)

1

Select [Print] from the [File] menu of WordPad.

2

Select the printer driver for the machine and click the [Preferences] button.

The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Preferences]) may vary depending on the application.

3

Select print settings.

(1) Click the [Main] tab.

(2) Select the original size.

• You can register up to seven user-defined sizes in the menu. To store an original size, select [Custom Paper] or one of [User1] to [User7] from the menu, and click the [OK] button.
• To select settings on other tabs, click the desired tab and then select the settings. PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS SCREEN / REFERRING TO HELP (page 4-6)
• If an original size larger than the largest paper size that the machine supports is set, select the paper size for printing in "Output Size".
• If an "Output Size" different from the "Original Size" is selected, the print image will be adjusted to match the selected paper size.

(3) Click the [OK] button.

4

Click the [Print] button.

Printing begins.

PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS SCREEN / REFERRING TO HELP

The printer driver settings screen consists of 9 tabs. Click a tab to select the settings on that tab.

You can check information on each of the settings in the Help screen. Click the [Help] button at the bottom right of the screen.

(1) Tabs: Click to change the tabs shown.

•[Main]: Frequently used functions are grouped on this tab. The settings are also on other tabs, and each setting on this tab is linked to the corresponding setting on the other tab.

•[Paper Source]: Set the size and type of paper used for printing, and the paper tray.

•[Finishing]: Select a finishing function such as stapling, punch, or folding, and set the output tray.

•[Layout]: Select functions related to the layout such as two-sided printing and booklet.

•[Job Handling]: Set Document Filing and user authentication.

•[Inserts]: Select insertion functions such as covers, inserts, and tab paper.

•[Stamp]: Select the watermark or stamp function.

•[Image Quality]: Select various image quality settings.

•[Detailed Settings]: Select tandem print and other detailed print settings.

(2) Favorites

Settings configured on each tab at the time of printing can be saved as Favorite. FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS (page 4-11)

(3) Defaults

Return the settings on the currently selected tab to their default state.

(4) Setup Items

Displays the settings on each tab.

(5) Information icon( )

Some restrictions exist on the combinations of settings that can be selected in the printer driver properties window. When a restriction exists on a selected setting, an information icon ( ⓘ ) will appear next to the setting. Click the icon to view an explanation of the restriction.

(6) Print image

This lets you visually check how the current settings affect the print image. Finishing settings are indicated by icons.

(7) Machine image

This shows the options that are installed on the machine, and the paper trays and output trays that are used.

(8) [Help] button

Displays the Help window of the printer driver.

- Help can be displayed for a setting by clicking the setting and pressing the [F1] key.

- You can click the ? button in the upper right corner of the settings screen and then click a setting to show Help for that setting in a sub-window.

SELECTING THE PAPER

Before printing, check the paper sizes, paper types, and paper remaining in the machine's trays. To check the most recent tray information, click the [Tray Status] button in the [Paper Source] tab.

The "Output Size" setting and the "Paper Tray" setting are related as follows:

• When "Paper Tray" is set to [Auto Select] The tray that contains paper of the size and type selected in "Output Size" and "Paper Type" is automatically selected.
• When "Paper Tray" is set to any setting other than [Auto Select] The specified tray is used for printing regardless of the "Output Size" setting.

When you have set "Paper Type" to [Bypass Tray], be sure to select "Paper Type". Check the paper type that is set for the bypass tray of the machine, check that paper of that type is actually loaded into the bypass tray, and then select the appropriate paper type.

- When "Paper Type" is set to [Auto Select]

A tray with plain paper or recycled paper of the size specified in "Output Size" is automatically selected. (The factory default setting is plain paper 1 only.)

- When "Paper Type" is set to anything other than [Auto Select]

A tray with the specified type of paper and the size specified in "Output Size" is used for printing.

Special media such as envelopes can also be placed in the bypass tray.

For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-22)".

When [Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray] (disabled by factory default) or [Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Tray] (enabled by factory default), which you can reach by selecting [System Settings] in "Settings (administrator)" → [Printer Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Bypass Tray Settings] is enabled, printing will not take place if the paper size or paper type specified in the printer driver is different from the paper size or paper type specified in the settings of the bypass tray.

PRINTING ON ENVELOPES

The bypass tray or tray 1 can be used for envelope printing.

• For the types of paper that can be used in the tray, see "APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES (page 1-12)".
• For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-22)".
• For the procedure for loading paper in the tray 1, see "TRAY 1 - 4 (when a stand/550/2x550/3x550/ 550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed) (page 1-15)".
• For more information on the procedure for loading paper, see "SELECTING THE PAPER (page 4-7)". • After printing, there may be creases in the envelope depending on the envelope type and format as well as on the printing environment. Before high-quantity printing, it is recommended that you conduct a test print.
• When using media such as envelopes that can be loaded only in a specific orientation, you can rotate the image 180 degrees. For more information, see "ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES (ROTATE 180 DEGREES) (page 4-37)"

(1) Click the [Paper Source] tab. (2) Select the envelope size from the "Output Size" menu.

When [Output Size] is set to envelope, [Paper Type] is automatically set to [Envelope].

When "Original Size" is set to envelope on the [Main] tab and "Output Size" is set to [Same as Original Size], "Paper Type" is automatically set to [Envelope].

(3) Select [Bypass Tray] or [Tray 1] in "Paper Tray".

PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED

The user information (such as login name and password) that must be entered varies depending on the authentication method being used, so check with the administrator of the machine before printing.

• If you have configured "Printing Policy" on the [Configuration] tab so that user authentication is always performed, users are required to be authenticated for each print job. This is done by entering authentication information in a dialog box that appears each time printing is performed.
• The machine's user authentication function cannot be used when the PPD driver* is installed and the Windows standard PS printer driver is used.
• For this reason, the machine can be configured to prohibit users from executing printing unless their user information is stored in the machine. * The PPD driver enables the machine to print using the Windows standard PS printer driver. (On the BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65, the PS3 expansion kit is required.)

1 In the printer driver properties window of the application, select the printer driver of the machine and click the [Preferences] button.

The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Preferences]) may vary depending on the application.

2

Enter your user information.

(1) Click the [Job Handling] tab.

(2) Enter your user information.

• When authentication is performed by login name, select [Login Name] and enter your login name.
• When authentication is performed by login name/password, click [Login Name/Password] and enter your login name and password. Enter the password using 1 to 32 characters
• When the machine's authentication destination is Active Directory, [Single Sign-on] can be selected. For information on single sign-on, refer to "AUTHENTICATION BY SINGLE SIGN-ON (page 4-111)".
• When authentication is performed by user number, select [User Number] and enter your 5 to 8 digit user number.

(3) Enter the user name and job name as necessary.

• Click the [User Name] checkbox, and enter your user name using up to 32 characters. The entered user name will appear on the touch panel of the machine. If you do not enter a user name, your PC login name will appear.
• Click the [Job Name] checkbox, and enter a job name using up to 30 characters. The entered job name will appear as a file name on the touch panel of the machine. If you do not enter a job name, the file name set in the application will appear.

(4) To have a confirmation window appear before printing starts, select the [Auto Job Control Review] checkbox.

(5) Click the [OK] button to execute printing.

Authentication by Single Sign-on requires that Active Directory authentication be performed on the machine and your computer. This can only be used when your computer is running Windows.

FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS

SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF PRINTING

Settings configured on each of the tabs at the time of printing can be saved as Favorite. Saving frequently used settings or complex settings under an assigned name makes it easy to select those settings the next time you need to use them. Settings can be saved from any tab of the printer driver properties window. Settings configured on each tab are listed at the time of saving, allowing you to check the settings as you save them.

Deleting saved settings

In step 2 of "USING SAVED SETTINGS (page 4-12)", select the user settings that you want to delete and click the [Delete] button.

1

Select the machine's printer driver from the print window of the application, and click the [Preferences] button.

The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Preferences]) may vary depending on the application.

2

Register Print Settings.

(1) Configure the print settings on each tab. (2) Click the [Save] button.

3

Check and save the settings.

(1) Check the displayed settings. (2) Enter a name for the settings using up to 20 characters. (3) Click the [OK] button.

USING SAVED SETTINGS

You can specify the saved favorites through just one click to apply frequently used settings or complicated settings to your printing.

1

Select the machine's printer driver from the print window of the application, and click the [Preferences] button.

The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Preferences]) may vary depending on the application.

2

Select favorite settings.

(1) Select the favorite settings you want to use. (2) Click the [OK] button.

3

Start printing.

CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER DEFAULT SETTINGS

You can change the default settings of the printer driver.

Changes you have made in the printer driver properties window when you execute printing from the application are returned to the default settings specified here when you exit the application.

1

Click the [Start] button, select [Settings] → [Device] → [Printers & scanners].

• In Windows 11, click the [Start] button, select [Bluetooth & devices] → [Printers & scanners].
• In Windows 8.1/Windows Server 2012, right-click the [Start] button, select [Control Panel] → [View devices and printers] (or [Devices and Printers]).

2

Click the printer driver name of the machine and click [Manage].

3

Click [Start].

4

Configure the settings and click the [OK] button.

For explanations of the settings, see printer driver Help.

SHARE FAVORITE SETTINGS BETWEEN SERVER AND CLIENT

When using this machine as a shared printer, if "Favorite" is set in the printer driver of the shared server, this setting can also be used on the shared destination.

When "Share Favorites" is enabled...

The favorite settings configured on the server can be used on the client computer.

Configure the following settings in the printer driver of the shared server.

1

Click the [Start] button, select [Settings] → [Device] → [Printers & scanners].

• In Windows 11, click the [Start] button, select [Bluetooth & devices] → [Printers & scanners].
• In Windows 8.1/Windows Server 2012, right-click the [Start] button, select [Control Panel] → [View devices and printers] (or [Devices and Printers]).

2

Click the printer driver name of the machine and click [Manage].

3

Click [Printer Properties].

4

Configure the sharing settings.

(1) Click the [Configuration] tab. (2) Set the [Share Favorites] check box to √.

PRINTING IN A macOS ENVIRONMENT

BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE

The following example explains how to print a document from the standard accessory application "TextEdit" in macOS.

• To install the printer driver and configure settings in a macOS environment, see the Software Setup Guide.
• The explanations of screens and procedures for use in a macOS environment generally assume that macOS 11 is being used and a PPD driver is installed. The screens may be different depending on the version of the operating system or the software application.
• The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application.
• On the BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65, the PS3 expansion kit is required to use the machine as a printer in a macOS environment.

1

Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu and select the printer.

If the printer drivers appear as a list, select the name of the printer driver to be used from the list.

2

Select paper settings.

(1) Make sure that the correct printer is selected. (2) Select paper settings. Paper size, paper orientation, and enlarge/reduce settings can be selected. (3) Click the [OK] button.

Select [Print] from the [File] menu.

Select print settings.

(1) Make sure that the correct printer is selected. (2) Select an item from the menu and configure the settings as needed. (3) Click the [Print] button.

SELECTING THE PAPER

This section explains the [Paper Feed] settings in the print settings window.

- When [Auto Select] is selected:

A tray that is set for plain or recycled paper (only plain paper 1 in the factory default setting) of the size specified in "Paper Size" on the page setup screen is automatically selected.

- When a paper tray is specified:

The specified tray is used for printing regardless of the "Paper Size" setting on the page setup screen.

For the bypass tray, also specify the paper type. Check that the paper type that is set for the bypass tray of the machine, check that paper of that type is actually loaded into the bypass tray, and then select the appropriate bypass tray (paper type).

- When a paper type is specified:

A tray with the specified type of paper and the size specified in "Paper Size" on the page setup screen is used for printing.

Special media such as envelopes can also be placed in the bypass tray. For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-22)".

When [Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray] (disabled by factory default) or [Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Tray] (enabled by factory default), which you can reach by selecting [System Settings] in "Settings (administrator)" → [Printer Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Bypass Tray Settings] is enabled, printing will not take place if the paper size or paper type specified in the printer driver is different from the paper size or paper type specified in the settings of the bypass tray.

PRINTING ON ENVELOPES

The bypass tray or tray 1 can be used for envelope printing.

• For the types of paper that can be used in the tray, see "APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES (page 1-12)".
• For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-22)".
• For the procedure for loading envelopes in tray 1, see "LOADING ENVELOPE IN TRAY 1 (page 1-17)".
• For more information on the procedure for loading paper, see "SELECTING THE PAPER (page 4-16)".
• When using media such as envelopes that can be loaded only in a specific orientation, you can rotate the image 180 degrees. For more information, see "ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES (ROTATE 180 DEGREES) (page 4-37)". • After printing, there may be creases in the envelope depending on the envelope type and format as well as on the printing environment. Before high-quantity printing, it is recommended that you conduct a test print.

Select the envelope size in the settings of the application ("Page Setup" in many applications) and then perform the following steps.

1

Select print settings.

(1) Select the envelope size from the "Paper Size" menu. (2) Select [Paper Feed]. (3) Select the [Bypass Tray (Envelope)] or [Tray 1] from the "All Pages From" menu.

When [Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Tray] (enabled by factory default) is enabled in "Settings (administrator)", set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Envelope].

PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED

The user information (such as login name and password) that must be entered varies depending on the authentication method being used, so check with the administrator of the machine before printing.

The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application.

In the application, select [Print] from the [File] menu.

2

Enter your user information.

(1) Make sure that the machine's printer name is selected. (2) Select [Job Handling]. (3) Click the [Authentication] tab. (4) Enter your user information.

• When authentication is carried out using the login name/password, enter your login name in "Login Name" and your password (1 to 32 characters) in "Password".
• When authentication is carried out using the user number, enter your user number (5 to 8 digits) in "User Number".

(5) Enter the user name and job name as necessary.

- User Name

Enter your user name using up to 32 characters. The entered user name will appear on the touch panel of the machine. If you do not enter a user name, your PC login name will appear.

• Job Name

Enter a job name using up to 32 characters. The entered job name will appear as a file name on the touch panel of the machine. If you do not enter a job name, the file name set in the application will appear.

(6) Click the [Print] button.

FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS

SELECTING THE RESOLUTION

The following three selections are available for "Print Mode" (resolution):

600 dpi This mode is suitable for printing data such as regular text or a table.
600 dpi (High Quality)	The print quality of photos and text are high.
1200 dpi*	Select this mode to print photos with higher definition, and to print fine lines clearly.

* This item cannot be used in BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65.

Windows

(1) Click the [Image Quality] tab. (2) Select "Print Mode".

macOS

(1) Select [Printer Features] and then select [Image Quality]. (2) Select "Print Mode".

2-SIDED PRINTING

The machine can print on both sides of the paper. This function is useful for many purposes, and is particularly convenient when you want to create a simple pamphlet. 2-sided printing also helps conserve paper.

Paper orientation	Print results
Portrait	Long Edge Short Edge
Landscape	Short Edge Long Edge
	The pages are printed so that they can be bound at the left or right side.	The pages are printed so that they can be bound at the top.

Windows

(1) Click the [Main] tab. (2) Select the paper orientation. (3) Select [Long Edge] or [Short Edge].

If necessary, you can select the method of implementing 2-sided printing. Click the [Other Settings] button on the [Detailed Settings] tab, and select the mode from "Duplex Style".

macOS

(1) Select [Layout]. (2) Select [Long-Edge binding] or [Short-Edge binding].

FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER

This function automatically enlarges or reduces the print image to match the size of the paper loaded in the machine. This function is convenient when enlarging a letter or A4 size document to ledger or A3 size to make it easier to view, or when printing a document on paper that is different in size from the original document.

The following example explains how to print a Letter (or A4) size document on A3 (or ledger) size paper.

Windows

(1) Click the [Main] tab. (2) Select the original size from [Original Size] (for example: A4). (3) Select the actual paper size to be used for printing from [Output Size] (for example: A3).

If the output size is larger than the original size, the printed image will be automatically enlarged.

If A0, A1, A2, B1, B2, or B3 size is selected in "Original Size", Letter (or A4) is automatically selected in "Output Size".

macOS

(1) Check the paper size for the print image (for example: A4). (2) Select [Paper Handling]. (3) Select [Scale to fit paper size]. (4) Select the actual paper size to be used for printing (for example: A3).

When you select A0 (Fit to Page), A1 (Fit to Page), A2 (Fit to Page), B1 (Fit to Page), B2 (Fit to Page), or B3 (Fit to Page) in "Paper Size", the selected paper size will be selected after the "Suggested Paper" in "Destination Paper Size".

PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE

This function reduces the print image and prints multiple pages on a single sheet of paper. You can print only the first page in the original size and print multiple reduced pages on the subsequent sheets.

For example, when [2-Up] (2 pages per sheet) or [4-Up] (4 pages per sheet) is selected, the following print results will be obtained, depending on the selected page order.

This is convenient when you want to print multiple images such as photos on a single sheet of paper, and when you want to conserve paper. When used in combination with 2-sided printing, this function saves more paper.

2-Up(2 pages per sheet)
Left to Right Right to Left Top To Bottom		(When the print orientation is landscape)

4-Up(4 pages per sheet)
Right, and Down	Down, and Right	Left, and Down	Down, and Left

• [N-Up] that can be set on the [Layout] tab can also be set on the [Main] tab. ("Order" can only be set in the [Layout] tab.)
• Note the following when printing multiple pages on one sheet:
• The page orders for 6-Up, 8-Up, 9-Up, and 16-Up are the same as for 4-Up.
• In a Windows environment, the page order can be viewed in the print image in the printer driver properties window.
• In a macOS environment, the page orders are displayed as selections.
• In a macOS environment, the number of pages that can be printed on a single sheet is 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16. Printing 8 pages on one sheet is not supported.
• For information on the "Repeat" function, see "PRINT THE SAME IMAGE IN TILE PATTERN (REPEAT PRINT) (page 4-74)".

The function for printing only the first page normally can only be used in the PCL6 printer driver.

Windows

(1) Click the [Layout] tab. (2) Select the number of pages per sheet. (3) Select the order of the pages. (4) If you wish to print borderlines, click the [Border] checkbox so that the checkmark appears.

• To print the first page normally (as a cover), select the [N-Up with cover] checkbox (PCL6 only).
• When [100% N-Up] is selected (☑) for jobs such as N-Up copying of two A4 size pages onto one A3 sheet, the pages will be printed at the full size of the original. If you select [Border] at this time, only the border will be printed.

macOS

(1) Select [Layout]. (2) Select the number of pages per sheet. (3) Select the order of the pages. (4) If you wish to print borderlines, select the desired type of borderline.

PRINTING WHILE SKIPPING BLANK PAGES

If the scanned original contains blank pages, the blank pages are skipped during printing. The machine detects blank pages and does not print them. This eliminates unnecessary printing without you having to check for blank pages before printing.

This function is available in a Windows environment.

• Depending on the state of the original, some pages that are not blank may be detected as blank pages and thus not printed, or some pages that are blank may not be detected as blank and thus printed.
• In N-Up Print, blank pages are not excluded and are printed.

Windows

(1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) Select [On] in [Disable Blank Page Print].

STAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN OUTPUT

STAPLE FUNCTION

The staple function staples the output. To create materials with more sophisticated appearance, the staple function can be used in combination with 2-sided printing.

This function saves considerable time when preparing handouts for a meeting or other stapled materials.

The stapling positions and the number of staples can be selected to obtain the following stapling results.

1 Staple*
Left Right Top
2 Staples
Left Right Top
Stapleless
Left Right Top

* The staple orientation (" " or "—"") varies depending on the size and orientation of the paper.

PUNCH FUNCTION

The punch function punches holes in the output. The punch hole positions are set by selecting the binding edge.

Left Right Top

• An inner finisher, finisher, finisher (large stacker), saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is required to use the staple function.
• An inner finisher, finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is required to use the stapleless staple function.
• To use the punch function, installing a punch module in the inner finisher, finisher, finisher (large stacker), saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker).
• For the maximum number of sheets that can be stapled, see "SPECIFICATIONS" in the Start Guide.
• The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled at once includes any covers and/or inserts that are inserted.
• For information on the saddle stitch function, see "CREATE A PAMPHLET (BOOKLET/SADDLE STITCH) (page 4-31)".

• The staple and offset (shifting the position of the paper that is output for each job) functions cannot be used simultaneously.
• When the finisher is disabled in the machine's settings, the staple function and punch function cannot be used.
• When the staple function or the punch function is disabled in the machine's settings, stapling or punching is not possible.

Windows

(1) Click the [Finishing] tab. (2) Select the staple function or the punch function.

- For the staple function, select the number of staples in the "Staple" menu and the staple position in the "Position" menu.

- For the punch function, select the type of punch in the "Punch" menu and the punch position in the "Position" menu.

• In addition to the [Finishing] tab, [Staple] can also be set on the [Main] tab.
• On the [Paper Source] tab, use [Force Letter-R for Letter Size] to always use letter size paper in landscape orientation. Using this setting, when printing mixed legal size, the short sides will be printed with the same width, so you can staple them together.

macOS

(1) Select [Printer Features] and then select [Output]. (2) Select "Binding Edge". (3) Select the staple function or the punch function.

• For the staple function, select the number of staples in the "Staple" menu.
• For the punch function, select the type of punch in the "Punch" menu.

Use [Force Letter-R for Letter Size] to always use letter size paper in landscape orientation. Using this setting, when printing mixed legal size, the short sides will be printed with the same width, so you can staple them together.

CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS

CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS

CREATE A PAMPHLET (BOOKLET/SADDLE STITCH)

The pamphlet function prints on the front and back of each sheet of paper so that the sheets can be folded and bound to create a pamphlet.

If a saddle finisher is installed and if "Booklet" and "Staple" are selected, this function automatically folds and outputs the copies. This is convenient when you wish to compile printed output into a pamphlet.

Windows

(1) Click the [Layout] tab. (2) Select [Standard] or [Full Image] in "Booklet".

• When [Standard] is selected, the printed image will be enlarged or reduced to fit the paper selected in "Output Size".
• When [Full Image] is selected, the printed image will be enlarged or reduced to fit the size selected in "Fit To Paper Size". By selecting a paper size that is larger than the print image, you can cut off the edges of the paper after making the booklet to create a booklet with no margins.
• When the number of output pages will exceed the number of sheets that can be stapled, you can select the [Split] checkbox (☑) to divide the output into multiple sub-booklets that can each be stapled. When stacked, the sub-booklets will have the same page order as the original pages.

(3) Select the specified output size and the binding edge.

• When [Standard] is selected, select the output paper size.
• When [Full Image] is selected, select the size to which you want to enlarge or reduce the print image in [Fit To Paper Size], and select the paper size you want to use for printing in "Output Size".

If a saddle stitch finisher is installed

(4) Click the [Finishing] tab. (5) Select [Saddle Stitch] from "Staple".

When a saddle finisher (large capacity) is installed and the job is not output correctly with [Saddle Stitch], select [Saddle Stitch (Reverse)].

macOS

(1) Select [Printer Features] and then select [Output]. (2) Select "Binding Edge". (3) Select [Saddle Stitch]. (4) Select [Tiled] or [2-Up].

PRINTING WITH MARGIN SHIFT SETTING (MARGIN)

This function shifts the print image to increase the margin at the left, the right, or the top of the paper.

If a finisher or saddle finisher is installed, the staple and punch functions of the machine can also be used together.

This is convenient when you wish to staple or punch the output but the binding area overlaps the text.

By shifting the image, the part of the image that is outside the print area will not be printed.

Windows

(1) Click the [Layout] tab. (2) Click the [Print Position] button. (3) Select [Margin Shift]. (4) Select the shift width.

Select from the "Margin Shift" menu. If you wish to configure another numeric setting, select the setting and click + - buttons or directly enter the number.

macOS

(1) Select [Printer Features] and then select [Output]. (2) Select "Binding Edge". (3) Select "Margin Shift".

CREATE A LARGE POSTER (POSTER PRINTING)

One page of print data is enlarged and printed using multiple sheets of paper (2 sheets (1 x 2), 4 sheets (2 x 2), 9 sheets (3 x 3) or 16 sheets (4 x 4)). The sheets can then be attached together to create a large poster. To enable precise alignment of the edges of the sheets during attachment, borderlines can be printed or overlapping edges can be created (overlap function).

This function is available in a Windows environment.

Windows

(1) Click the [Layout] tab. (2) Select the number of sheets to be used in "Poster Printing".

If you wish to print borderlines and/or use the overlap function, click the corresponding checkboxes so that the √ appears.

FUNCTIONS TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE

ADJUST PRINT POSITION ON ODD AND EVEN PAGES SEPARATELY (PRINT POSITION)

This function sets different print positions (margins) separately for odd and even pages and prints the pages.

This function is available in a Windows environment.

Windows

(1) Click the [Layout] tab. (2) Click the [Print Position] button. (3) Select [Custom]. (4) Set the amount of shifting of the print position for odd-numbered pages and even-numbered pages. (5) Click the [OK] button.

ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES (ROTATE 180 DEGREES)

This feature rotates the image 180 degrees so that it can be printed correctly on paper that can be loaded in only one orientation (such as envelopes or paper with punch holes).

Windows

(1) Click the [Main] tab. (2) Select [Portrait (Rotated)] or [Landscape (Rotated)] in "Orientation".

macOS

(1) Select [Layout]. (2) Select the [Reverse page orientation] checkbox so that it appears.

ENLARGING/REDUCING THE PRINT IMAGE (ZOOM SETTING/ENLARGE OR REDUCE)

This function enlarges or reduces the image to a selected percentage.

This allows you to enlarge a small image or add margins to the paper by slightly reducing an image.

When using the PS printer driver (Windows), you can set the width and length percentages separately to change the proportions of the image. (On the BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65, the PS3 expansion kit is required.)

Windows

(1) Click the [Main] tab. (2) Click the [Zoom] checkbox so that it appears, and click the [Settings] button. (3) Enter the percentage.

By clicking the + - button, you can specify the value in increments of 1%. In addition, select [Upper Left] or [Center] for the base point on the paper.

(4) Click the [OK] button.

macOS

(1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu and enter the ratio (%). (2) Click the [OK] button.

ADJUST THE LINE THICKNESS (WIDTH)

Adjusting line widths used in data such as CAD

This function increases the thickness of the entire line when the print lines are not clear in CAD or other special applications.

When the data includes lines of varying widths, you can print all lines at the minimum width as necessary.

• This function is available in a Windows environment. - This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used. - When printing from an application that processes lines as raster graphics, line widths cannot be adjusted.

Windows

(1) Click the [Image Quality] tab. (2) Click the [Line Width] button. (3) Set the line thickness and click the [OK] button.

• The units of line-width adjustment can be set to "Fixed Width" or "Ratio". Select from the "Unit" menu.
• To print all line data in the minimum line width, click the [Minimum Line Width] checkbox.

Thickening fine lines in Excel

When fine border lines in Excel do not print correctly, you can make the lines thicker.

• This function is available in a Windows environment.
• This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used. • Normally this setting is not necessary.

Windows

(1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) Click the [Other Settings] button. (3) Select the [Thicken Fine Lines] checkbox ( ).

Adjusting the thickness of text and lines

You can make text and lines thicker. You can also make edges smoother or sharper.

Windows

(1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) Click the [Other Settings] button. (3) Specify the settings.

Item Description
Text/Line control	Text	You can make characters and text thicker.
	Graphics
	Text+Graphics
	Text+Graphics+Photo
Text/Line Knockout control	Text	You can make knockout text and lines thicker.
	Text+Graphics
Image Enhancement	Auto		You can make the edges of text and graphics smoother or sharper. Auto: Perform optimal image enhancement. Off: No image enhancement is applied. Sharp: Image enhancement is applied sharply. Soft: Image enhancement is applied smoothly.
	Off
	Sharp Text	Text+Graphics
		Text+knockout text
		Text+Graphics+knockout text
		Text+Graphics+knockout
	Soft Text
		Text+Graphics
		Text+knockout text
		Text+Graphics+knockout text
		Text+Graphics+knockout

macOS

(1) Select [Printer Features]. (2) Select [Advanced2]. (3) Specify the settings.

PRINT A MIRROR-IMAGE (MIRROR-IMAGE REVERSE/VISUAL EFFECTS)

The image is reversed to create a mirror image.

This function is conveniently used to print a design for a woodblock print or other printing medium.

In a Windows environment, this function is only available when using the PS printer driver.

(On the BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65, the PS3 expansion kit is required.)

Windows

(1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) If you wish to reverse the image horizontally, select [Horizontal]. If you wish to reverse the image vertically, select [Vertical].

macOS

(1) Select [Layout]. (2) Select the [Flip horizontally] checkbox ( ).

IMAGE MODE ADJUSTING FUNCTION

ADJUST THE BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST OF THE IMAGE (IMAGE ADJUSTMENT)

This function adjusts the brightness and contrast in the print settings when a photo or other image is printed. This function makes simple corrections even if image editing software is not installed on your computer.

This function is available in a Windows environment.

Windows

(1) Click the [Image Quality] tab. (2) Click the [Image Adjustment] button. (3) To adjust objects (text, graphics, photos) individually, select the [Adjust at each object] checkbox ( ) and select the object. (4) Drag the slide bar or click buttons to adjust the image.

PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN BLACK (TEXT TO BLACK/VECTOR TO BLACK)

When printing a color image in grayscale, text and lines that are drawn in faint colors are printed in black. This function allows you to bring out color text and lines that are faint and difficult to see when printed in grayscale.

• Raster data such as bitmap images cannot be adjusted.
• This function is available in a Windows environment.

Windows

(1) Click the [Image Quality] tab. (2) Select the [Text To Black] checkbox and/or the [Vector To Black] checkbox so that appears.

• When [Text To Black] is selected, all text other than white text is printed in black.
• When [Vector To Black] is selected, all vector graphics other than white lines and areas are printed in black.

SELECTING IMAGE SETTINGS TO MATCH THE IMAGE TYPE

Preset settings are available in the machine's printer driver for various uses.

Graphics mode Select the graphics mode from "Raster" or "Vector".
Bitmap compression	The data compression ratio of bitmap is set. If the ratio is higher, the image quality becomes lower.
Screening	Select the screening to modify the image to suit specific preferences, according to the appropriate image processing method.
Sharpness	This setting creates a sharper image with clear outlines, or smooths the image for a softer effect.
Smoothing*	Resolution enhancement techniques (RETs) are used to smoothen the outlines of images. This setting processes the image to increase the resolution and smooth jagged image borders.

* This function is available in a Windows environment.

Windows

(1) Click the [Image Quality] tab. (2) Specify the settings.

macOS

(1) Select [Printer Features]. (2) Select [Image Quality]. (3) Specify the settings.

FUNCTIONS TO COMBINE TEXT AND IMAGES

ADDING A WATERMARK TO PRINTED PAGES (WATERMARK)

This function adds faint shadow-like text as a watermark in the background of the printed image. The size and angle of the watermark text can be adjusted.

The watermark text can be selected from the previously registered text in the list. When necessary, you can enter text to create an original watermark.

Windows

(1) Click the [Stamp] tab. (2) Select [Watermark] from "Stamp" and click the [Settings] button. (3) Select the watermark to be used and click the [OK] button.

Click the [Edit] button to select other detailed settings.

If you want to create a new watermark, enter the text of the watermark in the text box and click the [Add] button.

macOS

(1) Select [Watermarks]. (2) Click the [Watermark] checkbox and configure watermark settings.

• Configure detailed watermark settings such as selection of the text.
• Adjust the size and angle of the text by dragging the slide bar.

PRINTING AN IMAGE OVER THE PRINT DATA (IMAGE STAMP)

This function prints a bitmap or JPEG image stored on your PC over the print data.

This function prints a frequently used image or an icon of your own creation as if it is stamped on the print data. The size, position, and angle of the image can be adjusted.

This function is available in a Windows environment.

Windows

(1) Click the [Stamp] tab. (2) Select [Image Stamp] from "Stamp" and click the [Settings] button. (3) Select the image stamp to be used, and click the [OK] button.

• If an image stamp has already been stored, it can be selected from the menu.
• If you have not stored an image stamp, click the [Image File], select the file you wish to use for the image stamp, and click the [Add] button.

REGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGE

This function registers images used as custom images from the printer driver to the machine.

• This function is available in a Windows environment. - This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.

Windows

(1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) Click the [Custom Image Registration] button. (3) Select the registration type and name of the custom image.

When [Custom stamp] is selected in "Registered Type", non-transparent stamp image is registered. When [Custom watermark] is selected, transparent watermark image is registered.

If you have attempted to store multiple pages of data, only the first page will be stored.

OVERLAY A FIXED FORM ON THE PRINT DATA (OVERLAYS)

This function overlays data on a fixed form you have prepared.

By creating table rulings or a decorative frame in an application different from that of the text file and registering the data as an overlay file, an attractive print result can be easily obtained without the need for complex manipulations.

This function is available in a Windows environment.

Windows

Creating an overlay file

(1) Open the driver properties window from the application that is used for creating overlay data. (2) Click the [Stamp] tab. (3) Click the [Settings] button. (4) Click the [New] button and specify the name and folder to be used for the overlay file that you wish to create.

The file will be created when the settings are completed and printing is started.

• When printing is started, a confirmation message will appear. The overlay file will not be created until the [Yes] button is clicked.
• When you click the [Open] button, the existing overlay file is registered.

Printing with an overlay file

(1) Open the driver properties window from the application that is used for printing with an overlay file. (2) Click the [Stamp] tab. (3) Select an overlay file.

A previously created or stored overlay file can be selected from the menu.

ADDING THE NUMBER OF COPIES (COPIES STAMP)

You can add the number of copies to the header or footer of the print data. You can also set a copies number and print position.

This function is available in a Windows environment.

(1) Click the [Stamp] tab. (2) Click the [Copies Stamp] button. (3) Select the settings, and click the [OK] button.

PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL PURPOSES

PRINTING SPECIFIC PAGES ON DIFFERENT PAPER (DIFFERENT PAPER)

In a Windows environment

The front and back covers and specified pages of a document are printed on paper that is different from the other pages. Use this function when you wish to print the front and back covers on heavy paper, or insert colored paper or a different paper type at specified pages.

As necessary, paper can be inserted as insertion sheets where nothing is printed.

In a macOS environment

The front and back covers are printed using paper that is different from the other pages. This function can be used, for example, when you want to print only the front cover and last page on thick paper.

Windows

(1) Click the [Inserts] tab. (2) Select [Covers/Inserts] from [Inserts Option], and click the [Settings] button. (3) Select the paper insertion settings.

• Select the insertion position, paper source, and printing method from the corresponding menus.
• Click the [Add] button and your settings will appear in "Information".
• When you have finished selecting settings, click the [Save] button in "Favorites" to save the settings.

• When [Bypass Tray] is selected in "Paper Tray", be sure to select the "Paper Type" and load that type of paper in the bypass tray.
• When [Other Page] is selected for "Insert Position", specify the insert position by directly entering a page number. When "Printing Method" is set to [2-Sided Printing], the specified page and the next page after it will be printed on the front and reverse side of the paper, and thus an insert setting at a page printed on the reverse side will not be effective.

macOS

(1) Printer Features

(2) Feature Sets: Covers

(3)

Cover Page: Off

Paper Tray: Auto Select

Paper Type: Auto Select

Last Page: Off

Paper Tray: Auto Select

Paper Type: Auto Select

PDF

Low Toner

Cancel

Print

(1) Select [Printer Features]. (2) Select [Covers]. (3) Select the cover insertion settings.

Select the print setting, paper tray, and paper type for the front and back covers.

ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON TRANSPARENCY FILM (TRANSPARENCY INSERTS)

When transparency film is used for printing, this function prevents the sheets of transparency film from sticking together by inserting a sheet of paper between each sheet of film. As necessary, the same content as that printed on each sheet of transparency film is also printed on the corresponding sheet of inserted paper.

Windows

(1) Click the [Inserts] tab. (2) Select [Transparency Inserts] and click the [Settings] button.

Select the print setting, paper tray, and paper type for the front and back covers.

(3) Select the transparency insert settings.

When the [Printed] checkbox is selected to set to √, the same content as that printed on the transparency film is also printed on the insert. Select the paper source and type if needed.

Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Transparency] and load transparency film into the bypass tray.

macOS

(1) Select [Printer Features]. (2) Select [Transparency Inserts] in "Feature Sets". (3) Select the transparency insert settings.

When [On (Printed)] is selected from "Transparency Inserts", the same content as that printed on the transparency film is also printed on the insert. Select the paper source and type if needed.

Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Transparency] and load transparency film into the bypass tray.

INSERTING SEPARATOR PAGES BETWEEN JOBS OR COPIES

You can insert separator pages between jobs or the specified number of copies.

Job 1

Job 2

This function is available in a Windows environment.

Windows

(1) Click the [Finishing] tab. (2) Click the [Separator Page] button. (3) Changing the settings

• Select the paper tray and paper type from "Paper Selection", and specify the separator page position in "Insert Position". • To add a separator page each time printing of the set number of copies is completed, select [Per Copies] in "Insert Position".
• For example, if you are printing 10 copies and you select "5", a separator page will be added after the 5th copy and after the 10th copy.

When the bypass tray is selected, be sure to select the "Paper Type".

PRINTING A CARBON COPY (CARBON COPY)

This function prints an additional copy of the print image on paper that is of the same size but from a different paper tray. For example, if carbon copy print is selected when plain paper is loaded into tray 1 and colored paper is loaded into tray 2, a print result similar to a carbon copy slip is obtained with a single selection of the print command. If plain paper is loaded into tray 1 and recycled paper is loaded into tray 2 as necessary, selecting Carbon Copy simultaneously prints one copy for presentation and one copy as a duplicate.

This function is available in a Windows environment.

Windows

(1) Click the [Inserts] tab. (2) Select [Carbon Copy] from "Inserts Option" and click the [Settings] button. (3) Select the tray for the first copy from "Top Copy", and then select the tray for the carbon copy from "Carbon Copy".

When the bypass tray is selected, be sure to select the "Paper Type".

PRINTING TEXT ON TABS OF TAB PAPER (TAB SHIFT/TAB PAPER PRINT)

There are two methods of printing on the tabs of tab paper: "Tab Shift" and "Tab Paper Print".

Tab Shift

Create the text to be printed on tab paper in an application, and set the text shifting distance in [Print Position] on the [Layout] tab of the printer driver property window. The text will be printed on the tabs.

Tab Paper Print (for PCL6 only)

Tab sheets are printed while they are inserted between the desired pages.

Select [Tab Paper] in [Inserts Option] on the [Inserts] tab of the printer driver properties window, and enter the text that you want to print on the tabs. Specify the detailed settings such as the size of the tabs, the starting position, the distance between tabs, and the page numbers where tab sheets will be inserted.

• These functions are available in a Windows environment.
• Tab paper must be loaded into the bypass tray.

Windows

Tab Shift

When you have finished preparing the data to be printed on tab papers in an application, take the following steps:

(1) Click the [Layout] tab. (2) Click the [Print Position] button. (3) Select [Tab Shift]. (4) Specify the distance of shifting the image by directly entering a value or by clicking the button. (5) Click the [OK] button. (6) Select the paper source and type.

Click the [Paper Source] tab, and select [Bypass Tray] in "Paper Tray" and [Tab Paper] in "Paper Type".

Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Tab Paper] and load tab papers into the bypass tray.

Tab Paper Print (for PCL6 only)

Open the data into which you wish to insert tab paper, and then select the settings.

(1) Click the [Inserts] tab. (2) Select [Tab Paper] from "Inserts Option", and click the [Settings] button. (3) Select the tab position settings.

For commercially available tab paper, use the existing settings such as [A4-5tab-D] in "Favorites". For other types of tab paper, the position of the first tab, the distance between tabs, and the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the tab can be directly entered or changed using the + - button. In addition, select the size of the tab paper from "Output Size".

(4) Select the page settings.

Specify the pages where you wish to insert tab paper and enter the text that you wish to print on the tabs. Also select the font and adjust the layout.

• Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Tab Paper] and load tab papers into the bypass tray.
• The tab paper settings can be stored and a stored file can be opened from "Favorites".

TWO-SIDED PRINTING WITH SPECIFIC PAGES PRINTED ON THE FRONT SIDE (CHAPTER INSERTS)

This function prints specific pages on the front side of the paper.

When you specify a page (such as a chapter cover page) to be printed on the front side of the paper, it is printed on the front side of the next sheet even if it would normally be printed on the reverse side of the paper.

Example: When pages 4 and 8 are specified as page settings.

(4 has a reverse side, and 3 and 8 are blank on the reverse side.)

• This function is available in a Windows environment. - This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.

Windows

(1) Click the [Layout] tab. (2) Select the 2-Sided Printing.

For information on the "2-Sided Printing" setting, see "2-SIDED PRINTING (page 4-21)".

(3) Enter the page numbers of the initial pages of the chapters, separating the numbers with commas.

FOLDING PAPER FOR PRINTING (FOLD)

If a folding unit is installed, print paper can be folded.

For example, if A4 (8-1/2" × 11") and A3 (11" × 17") size print images are mixed, you can fold A3 (11" × 17") size paper to the A4 (8-1/2" × 11") size to adjust the width of the actual print paper to the A4 (8-1/2" × 11") size. When necessary, you can staple folded sheets.

To use the Half Fold and Saddle Fold (Staple) functions, you need to mount a saddle stitch finisher.

Types of paper folding functions

Folding types	Print Side	Fold Orientation	Folding results Descrition
Saddle Fold	Inside -			Multiple sheets are collectively folded in the center.
	Outside -
Half Fold	Inside -			Paper is folded in the center.Copies are output sheet by sheet.
	Outside -
C-Fold	Inside	Open Right		For example, paper is folded in three so that it can be put into an envelope. Copies are output sheet by sheet.
		Open Left
	Outside	Open Right
		Open Left
Accordion Fold	- Open Right			For example, paper is folded in three so that it can be put into an envelope. Copies are output sheet by sheet.
	- Open Left
Z-Fold	- Open Right			For example, if A4 (8-1/2" × 11") and A3 (11" × 17") size print images are mixed, only the A3 (11" × 17") size paper is folded and changed to A4 (8-1/2" × 11") size paper.Copies are output sheet by sheet.
	- Open Left

• When printing data in a pamphlet layout, the "Booklet" function can be used to conveniently fold and staple printed output to create a pamphlet. See "CREATE A PAMPHLET (BOOKLET/SADDLE STITCH) (page 4-31)".
• The Fold function cannot be used together with the Punch and Staple functions. However, when finisher (large capacity) or saddle stitch finisher (large capacity) is installed the Z-Fold function can be used together with the punch and staple functions when one of the following paper size is specified.

• B4, A3, 8K, Ledger (11" × 17")

• When a saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is mounted, the Saddle Fold function folds five sheets every set. For example, if an original has 12 A4 size plain sheets, they are folded three times in total: 5 sheets + 5 sheets + 2 sheets. However, some types of paper reduces the number of sheets that are folded every set. For example, heavy paper is folded on a three-sheet basis.
• When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, the Saddle Fold function folds sheets one by one.

Windows

Folding

(1) Click the [Finishing] tab. (2) Select the folding method in "Fold", and click the [Settings] button. (3) Select the desired folding method.

Folding (Z-Fold)

(1) Click the [Finishing] tab. (2) Select the folding method in "Z-Fold", and click the [Settings] button. (3) Select the paper to be folded and choose the opening direction.

macOS

Folding

(1) Select [Printer Features]. (2) Select [Folding]. (3) Select the desired folding method.

Folding (Z-Fold)

(1) Select [Printer Features], then select [Folding (Z-Fold)]. (2) Configure Fold settings.

INSERT PRESET DATA BEFORE OR AFTER EACH PAGE (PAGE INTERLEAVE)

This function inserts a preset data item into every page during printing.

You can easily create documents with opened page spread that is made up of text on the left-hand page and a memo space on the right-hand page.

Pre-set data

• This function is available in a Windows environment.
• This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.

Windows

You have to create page data to be inserted in advance.

For the procedure for creating page data, see "Creating an overlay file (page 4-54)" in "OVERLAY A FIXED FORM ON THE PRINT DATA (OVERLAYS) (page 4-54)".

(1) Click the [Stamp] tab. (2) Click the [Settings] button. (3) Select [Page Interleave] from the "Printing Method". (4) Set the overlay data to be inserted and set its insertion position.

PRINT THE SAME IMAGE IN TILE PATTERN (REPEAT PRINT)

This function prints the same image in tile pattern on a sheet. This is useful for producing name cards and stickers.

• This function is available in a Windows environment.
• This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.

Windows

(1) Click the [Main] tab. (2) Select the repeat count in "N-Up".

PRINTING PATTERN DATA (HIDDEN PATTERN PRINT)

This function prints pattern data such as "DO NOT COPY" behind the print data.

If paper with pattern data is duplicated, the pattern data emerges in the background, which will help to prevent information from being leaked through unauthorized document copying.

• This function is available in a Windows environment.
• This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.

Windows

(1) Click the [Stamp] tab. (2) Click the [Hidden Pattern] button. (3) Configure the settings for hidden pattern printing and click the [OK] button.

The hidden pattern printing function cannot be used when "Print Mode" is set to [1200 dpi].

• "Hidden Pattern" is a function provided for the purpose of deterring unauthorized printing. It does not guarantee the prevention of information leakage.
• Text may not be completely hidden on an output sheet with a pattern print under certain machine conditions. In "Settings (administrator)", select [Security Settings] → [Hidden Pattern Print Setting] → [Contrast] if this is the case.
• The hidden pattern may not emerge on copies with certain types of devices or under certain setting conditions used to copy an output sheet with a pattern print.

CHANGING THE RENDERING METHOD AND PRINTING JPEG IMAGES (USE DRIVER TO RENDER JPEGS)

In some situations, a document containing a JPEG image may not be printed correctly. This can be solved by changing the way the JPEG image is rendered.

When you print an original containing JPEG images, this function allows you to select whether the images are rendered in the printer driver or the machine.

• This function is available in a Windows environment. - When images are rendered in the printer driver, it may take time until the printing is completed.

Windows

(1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) Click the [Other Settings] button. (3) Click the [Use driver to render JPEGs] checkbox so that appears. (4) Click the [OK] button.

MAXIMIZING THE PRINT AREA ON THE PAPER (PRINT AREA)

By maximizing the print area, you can print on the full paper size.

This function is available in a Windows environment.

Even when the print area is maximized, edges may be cut off.

Windows

(1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) Click the [Other Settings] button. (3) Select [Maximum] from the "Printable Area". (4) Click the [OK] button.

CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS

USING TWO MACHINES TO PRINT A LARGE PRINT JOB (TANDEM PRINT)

To use this function, two machines that can perform tandem printing are required.

Two machines connected to the same network are used to run a large print job in parallel. This function reduces the printing time when you handle a large number of prints.

Example: Printing four sets of copies (2 sets of copies are executed by the primary unit and secondary unit each)

This function is available in a Windows environment.

To use the tandem print function, the IP address of the secondary unit must be registered in the printer driver.

Windows

(1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) Select [On] in "Tandem Print".

The tandem print function can be used only when the printer driver has been installed using "Custom Installation" with [LPR Direct Print (Specify Address/Auto Search)] selected and with the [...] checkbox selected for "Do you want to use Tandem Print function?".

SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES (DOCUMENT FILING)

This function stores a print job as a file on the machine's local drive, allowing the job to be printed from the touch panel when needed. The location for storing a file can be selected to prevent the file from being mixed together with files of other users.

- Hold Only This setting is used to hold a print job on the machine's local drive without printing it.

- Hold After Print This setting is used to hold a print job on the machine's local drive after it is printed.

- Sample Print When a print job is sent to the machine, only the first set of copies is printed. After checking the contents of the first set of copies, you can print the remaining sets from the operation panel of the machine. This prevents the occurrence of excessive misprints.

• For the procedure for printing files stored on the machine's local drive, see "FILE PRINTING (page 7-24)" in "Document Filing".
• When printing from a PC, you can set a password (4 to 8 digits) to maintain the confidentiality of information in a stored file. When a password is set, the password must be entered to print data.
• [Document Filing] that can be set on the [Job Handling] tab can also be set on the [Main] tab.

Windows

(1) Click the [Job Handling] tab. (2) Select the function from the "Document Filing". (3) Select the folder for storing the file in "Stored to".

To enter a password (4 to 8 digit number), click the [PIN Code] checkbox so that the checkmark ☑ appears. To create a public PDF for PC browsing, select the [Create PDF for PC Browsing] checkbox (☑).

• When [Quick File] is selected, "Document Filing" will be set to [Hold After Print].
• When [Quick File] is selected, the password entered in "Document Filing" is cleared.
• If necessary, you can select the data format from CMYK and RGB for data to be stored in the machine. Click the [Other Settings] button on the [Detailed Settings] tab and select the format from "Rip Style".
• To store a file in a custom folder, you must first create the custom folder using [Document Operations] in "Settings (administrator)" → [Document Filing]. If you have set a password for the custom folder, enter the password (5 to 8 digit number) in "PIN Code" on the stored to screen.

If you have configured to always use the force document filing function in "Printing Policy" on the [Configuration] tab, you cannot clear the [Document Filing] checkbox.

macOS

(1) Select [Job Handling]. (2) Select [Retention]. (3) Select how to save the print data in "Document Filing".

If necessary, you can enter a password (4 to 8-digit number).

(4) Select the folder to store the file in "Stored To".

If you selected [Custom Folder], enter the name of the custom folder where you want to save the file.

• When [Quick File] is selected, "Document Filing" will be set to [Hold After Print].
• When [Quick File] is selected, the password entered in "Document Filing" is cleared.
• If necessary, you can select the data format from CMYK and RGB for data to be stored in the machine. Select [Advanced1] in [Printer Features] and select the format from "Rip Style".
• To store a file in a custom folder, you must first create the custom folder using [Document Operations] in "Settings (administrator)" → [Document Filing]. If you have set a password for the custom folder, enter the password (5 to 8 digit number) in "PIN Code" on the folder selection screen.

AUTOMATICALLY PRINT ALL STORED DATA

When user authentication is enabled on the machine, all document filing (stored) print jobs of the user who logs in are automatically printed. After all jobs are printed, the stored jobs are deleted.

To use the Print All function, the following steps are necessary:

• In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Authentication Settings] → [Default Settings] and enable [Automatically print stored jobs after login].
• When executing document filing print, in addition to the user authentication information, click on the "User Name" checkbox to enter a user name.

Using this function in a Windows environment: PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT (page 4-4)

Using this function in a macOS environment: PRINTING IN A macOS ENVIRONMENT (page 4-15)

Files with a password and files that are protected by the document filing function of the machine will not be printed. Files in a folder (excluding My Folder) that has a password will also not be printed.

(1) Select [Job Handling]. (2) After logging in to the machine, a confirmation message will appear, and then tap the [OK] key.

The print files stored in the quick file folder, main folder, and custom folder will be printed automatically and then deleted.

PRINTING AND SENDING SIMULTANEOUSLY

This function prints data created in an application from the machine and simultaneously sends the data to the addresses stored in the machine.

This function allows you to complete two tasks, printing and sending, with one operation from the printer driver.

• Addresses must be stored in advance in the machine. For more information, see "STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY (page 6-19)".
• You must complete the preparatory steps for using each sending function of the machine. For more information, see the explanation of each sending function.

• This function is available in a Windows environment.
• This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.

Windows

(1) Click the [Job Handling] tab. (2) Click the [Print and Send] button. (3) Select the [Print and Send] checkbox so that appears. (4) Click the [Get Address Book] button. (5) From the "Address Book" list, select the address to which you wish to send the data, and click the [Add] button to add the address to the "Destination" list.

• If you wish to send the data to all addresses, click the [Add All] button.
• To delete an address from the "Destination" list, select the address and click the [Delete] button. If you wish to delete all addresses, click the [Delete All] button.

• Up to 50 destinations can be specified. • Data cannot be sent to an Internet Fax address.

(6) Click the [OK] button.

The printer driver settings are applied to sending settings.

PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER

EXTENSION OF PRINTABLE FILES

When you do not have the printer driver installed on your PC, or when the application used to open a file that you wish to print is not available, you can print directly to the machine without using the printer driver.

The file types (and corresponding extensions) that can be printed directly are shown below.

File Type	TIFF	JPEG	PNG	PCL	PS*1	PDF/Encrypt PDF/Compact PDF*1	DOCX, XLSX, PPTX*2
Extension tiff,	tif	jpeg, jpg, jpe, jfif	png pcl, prn ps, prn pdf				docx, xlsx, pptx

*1 On the BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65, the PS3 expansion kit is required. *2 On the BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65, the Direct print expansion kit is required.

Some files may not print correctly even if shown in the above table.

DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON AN FTP SERVER

When an FTP server is configured, you can directly select and print files on the FTP server from the touch panel of the machine. This function eliminates the need for downloading the files from the FTP server to your PC and sending print jobs from the PC to the machine.

When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing. PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE (page 4-98)

1

Tap the [File retrieve] key.

2

Tap the [Select File from FTP to Print] key on the action panel.

3

Tap the key of the FTP server that you wish to access.

When a server is selected, entry of a user name and password may be necessary. Enter your user name and password, and tap the [Enter] key.

4

Tap the key of the file that you wish to print, and tap the [Choose Print Settings] key on the action panel.

• When printing multiple files, tap the keys of the files you wish to print, and tap the [Print] key on the action panel.
• The icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be printed.
• The icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders on the FTP server. To display a folder or a file in a folder, tap this key.

• A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.
• Tap to move up one folder level.
• When you move down a folder level by tapping a folder key, appears. Tap this key to return to the file or folder name selection screen.

- Tap to switch to thumbnails.

- Tap the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. Each time the key is tapped, the order changes between ascending and descending.

- When you tap [Filter by File Type] in the action panel, the screen to specify the file format will be displayed. Select the file format you want to narrow down, and tap the [OK] key to display the list of files narrowed down to the selected file format. You can select other file formats in [Other].

- The file format that can be selected by narrowing down the list is always the same, regardless of the installation status of the peripheral device. There are some file formats that cannot be used depending on the status of the machine. When you select a file format that this machine does not support for printing, the [Start] key will be grayed out and you will not be able to print.

5

Select the print conditions.

• If you have selected multiple files in step 4, you can select only the number of prints.
• If you selected a PS or PCL file that includes print conditions in step 4, the print conditions in the file will be given priority.

6

Tap the [Start] key.

Printing begins after the selected file is downloaded.

Qualcomm® DirectOffice™ is a product of Qualcomm Technologies, Inc. and/or its subsidiaries. Qualcomm® is a trademark of Qualcomm Incorporated, registered in the United States and other countries. DirectOffice™ is a trademark of CSR Imaging US, LP, registered in the United States and other countries.

DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN USB MEMORY

Files in a USB memory device connected to the machine are printed from the operation panel of the machine without using the printer driver.

When the printer driver of the machine is not installed on your PC, you can copy a file into a commercially available USB memory device and connect the device to the machine to print the file directly.

• Use FAT32, NTFS or exFAT format for USB memory device.
• When the format of the USB memory device is FAT32, use a 32 GB or less USB memory device.

When you select a PDF file that has a password, enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing. PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE (page 4-98)

1

Connect the USB memory device to the machine.

2

When the screen for selecting the action appears, tap [Print from external memory device (USB)].

If the screen does not appear, follow the steps below.

(1) Tap the [File retrieve] key. (2) Tap the [Select File from USB Memory to Print] key on the action panel.

3

Tap the key of the file that you wish to print, and tap the [Choose Print Settings] key on the action panel.

• When printing multiple files, tap the keys of the files you wish to print, and tap the [Print] key on the action panel.
• The icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be printed.
• The icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders in the USB memory device. To display a folder or a file in a folder, tap this key.

• A total of 500 keys of files and folders can be displayed.

• Tap to move up one folder level.
• When you move down a folder level by tapping a folder key, 📄 appears. Tap this key to return to the file or folder name selection screen.
• Tap to switch to thumbnails.
• Tap the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. Each time the key is tapped, the order changes between ascending and descending.

4

Select the print conditions.

• If you have selected multiple files in step 3, you can select only the number of prints.
• If you selected a PS or PCL file that includes print conditions in step 3, the print conditions in the file will be given priority.

5

Tap the [Start] key.

Printing begins after the selected file is transferred.

6

Remove the USB memory device from the machine.

DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN A NETWORK FOLDER

You can specify and print a file in a network folder from the touch panel of the machine.

Even if the network folder is not registered, you can access the network folder by directly entering or referring to the path to the folder in the workgroup.

To register a network folder:

In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Printer Settings] → [Direct Print Settings (Network Folder)].

When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing. PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE (page 4-98)

PRINTING A FILE IN THE NETWORK FOLDER YOU HAVE CONFIGURED IN THE MACHINE'S SETTINGS

1

Tap the [File retrieve] key.

2

Tap the [Select File from Network Folder to Print] key on the action panel.

3

Tap the [Open Registered Network Folder.] key on the action panel and tap the network folder that you wish to access.

If a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name and password, check with your server administrator and enter the appropriate user name and password.

• When you tap the [Direct Input of Folder Path] key, a screen appears to allow direct input of the network folder path. For more information, see "Entering the network folder path directly (page 4-91)".
• When you select the workgroup, server, and network folder in sequence, you can access the network folder. For more information, see "Referring to the network folder path (page 4-92)".

4

Tap the key of the file that you wish to print, and tap the [Choose Print Settings] key on the action panel.

• When printing multiple files, tap the keys of the files you wish to print, and tap [Print] on the action panel.
• The icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be printed.
• The icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders in the network folder. To display a folder or a file in a folder, tap this key.
• When you tap [Filter by File Type] in the action panel, the screen to specify the file format will be displayed. Select the file format you want to narrow down, and tap [OK] key to display the list of files narrowed down to the selected file format. [Others] allows you to select other file types.
• The file formats that can be selected by narrowing down the list are always the same, regardless of the status of the peripheral device. Some file formats may not be available depending on the status of the unit.

• A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.
• Tap to move up one folder level. • To return to the network folder selection screen, tap
• Tap to switch to thumbnails.
• Tap the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. Each time the key is tapped, the order changes between ascending and descending.
• When you tap [Filter by File Type] in the action panel, the screen to specify the file format will be displayed. Select the file format you want to narrow down, and tap the [OK] key to display the list of files narrowed down to the selected file format.

You can select other file formats in [Other].

- The file format that can be selected by narrowing down the list is always the same, regardless of the installation status of the peripheral device. There are some file formats that cannot be used depending on the status of the machine. When you select a file format that this machine does not support for printing, the [Start] key will be grayed out and you will not be able to print.

5

Select the print conditions.

• If you have selected multiple files in step 4, you can select only the number of prints.
• If you selected a PS or PCL file that includes print conditions in step 4, the print conditions in the file will be given priority.

6

Tap the [Start] key.

Printing begins after the selected file is transferred.

Entering the network folder path directly

1

Tap [Direct Input of Folder Path] in step 3 of "PRINTING A FILE IN THE NETWORK FOLDER YOU HAVE CONFIGURED IN THE MACHINE'S SETTINGS (page 4-90)".

2

Enter the path to the folder, user name and password.

Access the network folder. For the procedure for printing, see steps 4 to 6 of "Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine's settings".

Referring to the network folder path

1

Tap the key of the workgroup that you wish to access in step 3 of "PRINTING A FILE IN THE NETWORK FOLDER YOU HAVE CONFIGURED IN THE MACHINE'S SETTINGS (page 4-90)".

2

Tap the key of the server or computer that you wish to access.

If a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name and password, check with your server administrator and enter the appropriate user name and password.

3

Tap the key of the network folder that you wish to access.

Access the network folder.

For the procedure for printing, see steps 4 to 6 of "PRINTING A FILE IN THE NETWORK FOLDER YOU HAVE CONFIGURED IN THE MACHINE'S SETTINGS (page 4-90)".

• Tap the 🔒 icon and enter a keyword to search for a workgroup, server, or network folder. To enter text, see "STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY (page 6-19)".
• Up to 100 workgroups, 100 servers, and 100 network folders are displayed.
• Tap to move up one folder level. • To return to the workgroup selection screen, tap

DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM A COMPUTER

SUBMIT PRINT JOB

By selecting [Document Operations] → [Submit Print Job] from "Settings (Web version)" and specifying a file, you can directly print the file without using the printer driver.

In addition to a file on your PC, this procedure can be used to print any file that can be accessed from your PC, such as a file on another PC connected to the same network.

Files that can be printed are PDF*1, TIFF, JPEG, PCL, PS*1, XPS, DOCX*2, PPTX*2, and XLSX*2 files with extensions pdf*1, tif, tiff, jpeg, jpg, jpe, jfif, pcl, ps*1, xps, docx*2, pptx*2, and xlsx*2. Available only if the MFP supports PostScript. Enter the password for the encrypted PDF data on Spool Queue of the Job Status screen.

*1 On the BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65, the PS3 expansion kit is required.

*2 On the BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65, the Direct print expansion kit is required.

- If you selected a PS or PCL file that includes print conditions, the print conditions in the file will be given priority.

- When user authentication is enabled in the settings of the machine, the print function may be restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.

Print Settings

Select print settings. Select the file you want to print in "Select File", select settings, and then click [Print].

Item Description
Copies Set the number of copies to be printed.
Paper Size Set the print size.
Orientation	Select portrait or landscape for the print orientation.
2-Sided Print	Select one-sided printing, two-sided printing (booklet), or two-sided printing (tablet).
Output	If printing by set, select the “Print per Unit” checkbox.
Staple Select staple settings.
Separator Page	Select to insert separator pages. Specify whether separator pages are to be added in front of or behind each set. Select the paper tray with the paper you want to use from the paper trays.
Fit To Page Print with the file expanded to the full paper size.
Print What	BP-70M31/BP-70M36/BP-70M45/BP-70M55/BP-70M65 or when the direct print expansion kit is installed on the BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65, select whether to print a sheet or to print the entire workbook when printing an Excel file.
Output Tray Select the output tray for the print job.
Quick File Save the print data in the Quick File Folder of the machine.
Print Glossy	Select this checkbox if the print job will be printed on glossy paper.
Fold Set the paper fold.
Billing Code	Select the checkbox of the Billing Code to assign, and then enter the billing code.

Qualcomm® DirectOffice™ is a product of Qualcomm Technologies, Inc. and/or its subsidiaries. Qualcomm® is a trademark of Qualcomm Incorporated, registered in the United States and other countries. DirectOffice™ is a trademark of CSR Imaging US, LP, registered in the United States and other countries.

FTP PRINT

You can print a file from your PC by simply dragging and dropping the file onto the FTP server of the machine.

Performing FTP print

Enter the IP address of this machine in the server name field of your FTP client application to connect to this machine. When you upload the file you want to print in the "Ip" folder on the FTP server of this machine, printing will start automatically.

• If you selected a PS or PCL file that includes print conditions, the print conditions in the file will be given priority.
• When user authentication is enabled in the settings of the machine, the print function may be restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.

E-MAIL PRINT

If you configure your e-mail account in the machine, the machine periodically checks your mail server and automatically prints received e-mail attachments without using the printer driver.

To perform e-mail print:

In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Printer Settings] → [E-mail Print Settings], and register your e-mail account. (Administrator rights are required.)

Performing e-mail print

Using your PC's e-mail software, specify the e-mail address of the machine in "Address" and send e-mail attached with a file to be printed.

Control commands can be entered in the message of the e-mail to specify the number of copies and print format.

Commands are entered in the format "command name = value" as shown in the following example.

COPIES=2

DUPLEX=LEFT

ACCOUNTNUMBER=11111

PAPER=A4

As an example, the control commands include the following:

Function Command name Values
Copies COPIES 1 to 9999
Staple*1	STAPLEOPTION	NONE, ONE, TWO, SADDLE, STAPLELESS
Punch*2	PUNCH OFF, ON
Punch holes PUNCH-NUMBER TWO, THREE, FOUR, FOURWIDE
Collate COLLATE OFF, ON
2-sided Print DUPLEX TOP, LEFT, RIGHT, OFF
Account Number*3	ACCOUNTNUMBER Number (5 to 8 digits)
File Format*4	LANGUAGE	PCL, PCLXL, POSTSCRIPT, PDF, TIFF, JPG
Paper PAPER		Paper that can be used (LETTER, A4, or others)
Fold*5	V-FOLD	OFF, INSIDE, OUTSIDE
Fold (Z-Fold)*6	FOLD	OFF, A3, A4, B4, 8K, LEDGER, LEGAL, MXLEGAL, LETTER
Document Filing*7	FILE	OFF, ON
	FOLDERNAME	Up to 28 characters
Quick File*7	QUICKFILE	OFF, ON
Output	OUTTRAY	CENTER, RIGHT, FINISHER, TOPTRAY
Fit Page	FITIMAGETOPAGE	OFF, ON
Print Glossy	MEDIATYPE	GLOSSY
Print Pages	PRINTPAGES	1-2,5,9-
Print What*8	ALLSHEETS	OFF, ON

*1 Enabled only when an inner finisher, finisher, finisher (large stacker), saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is installed. "STAPLELESS" is only enabled when an inner finisher, finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) that allows stapling without staples is installed. *2 Enabled only when a punch module is attached to the inner finisher, finisher, finisher (large stacker), saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker). *3 Can be omitted except when authentication is by user number. *4 On the BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65, the PS3 expansion kit is required for POSTSCRIPT and PDF files. *5 When a Direct print expansion kit is installed. *6 When the folding unit is installed. *7 Only enabled when either "Document Filing" or "Quick File" is "ON". When both are "ON", this is disabled. *8 On the BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65, the Direct print expansion kit is installed.

• The mail text must be in a text format. If entered in Rich Text format (HTML), the commands will have no effect.
• If you enter "Config" in the mail text, a list of control commands is returned.
• If nothing is entered in the body text (message) of the e-mail, printing will take place according to the settings configured in "Settings (administrator)." → [System Settings] → [Printer Settings] → [Initial Status Settings]. If you selected a PS or PCL file that includes print conditions, the print conditions in the file will be given priority.
• Enter a file type only when you wish to specify the page-description language. Normally there is no need to enter a file type.
• Images such as the body of the received email and the logo in the signature may also be printed.

Qualcomm® DirectOffice™ is a product of Qualcomm Technologies, Inc. and/or its subsidiaries.

Qualcomm ^® is a trademark of Qualcomm Incorporated, registered in the United States and other countries.

DirectOffice™ is a trademark of CSR Imaging US, LP, registered in the United States and other countries.

Universal Print

Universal Print is a service that allows data from users and computers connected to Microsoft 365 to be printed on MFPs and printers via the Universal Print service operated by Microsoft. With Universal Print, MFPs and printers can be centrally monitored and configured using Azure Active Directory, rather than having to install a printer server and install printer drivers on each user's computer. monitoring and configuration.

Users can also print to MFPs and printers connected to the Universal Print service via the cloud, without having to install a printer driver on each user's computer.

• This section describes the licenses and other information you will need to use Universal Print, assuming you have already prepared them. Contact Microsoft for more information on the licenses required to use Universal Print.
• For the BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65, the PS3 expansion kit is required.

BEFORE CONNECTING THE Universal Print SERVICE

Before connecting the machine to the Universal Print service, make sure that the machine is connected to the Internet beforehand and that [IPP INFRA] is enabled in the client port in "Port Control (page 9-180)" in the setting mode.

The machine must also be registered in Azure Active Directory and on the client PC before it can be used with the Universal Print service. For information on how to register with Azure Active Directory and client PCs, see "Universal Print Settings (page 4-97)".

Printing methods

Once registration is complete, you will be able to print from various Windows applications.

Open the print menu of each application, select the machine and print.

Printing permissions for invalid users

Prints from Universal Print are treated as jobs from "Other User". Therefore, if "Disable Printing by Invalid User (page 9-129)" is enabled in the setting mode, change it to disabled.

Also, if user authentication is enabled in the OSA application, the OSA application should allow invalid users to print.

Registering and deleting from the Universal Print service

You can register or delete the machine in "Universal Print Settings (page 4-97)".

Operation in power saving mode

Prints from Universal Print, as well as normal prints, can be made in the power saving mode, but will return and start printing as soon as the data is communicated to the machine.

When registered with Universal Print, the machine does not shift to "Low Power" in "Sleep Mode Power Level (page 8-5)."

Universal Print Settings

This function allows you to register or remove the device from the Azure Active Directory, check the current registration status, or enable or disable the Universal Print function.

To register with Azure Active Directory, launch the setting mode from your web browser.

Registering the machine with Azure Active Directory

To register the machine with the Universal Print Service, follow the procedure below from the web administration screen.

(1) Open "Universal Print Settings" in System Settings. (2) Check the printer name and click "Run" under "Register with Universal Print".

You will be presented with a registration code and a URL for registering your code. The registration code is valid for 15 minutes. If you register after 15 minutes, you will have to start from the beginning.

(3) Click on the URL for code registration.

A separate window will open in which you can enter your registration code.

(4) Follow the instructions on the screen to enter the registration code. (5) View the Azure Active Directory Universal Print management screen in a web browser. (6) Select the registered printer and click [Share Printer]. (7) Click [Members], and then click [Add]. (8) Select a member or group from the list to use the machine.

To use the machine with the Universal Print service, continue with "Registering the machine with each client PC" below.

Registering the machine with each client PC

To register the machine with each client PC, follow the procedure below on your computer.

(1) Click the [Start] button, select [Settings] → [Accounts]. (2) Click [Connect] under [Access work or school].

If necessary, follow the prompts to sign in with your Microsoft 365 account.

(3) Click [Home], and then click [Devices]. (4) Click [Printers & Scanners], and then click [Add Printer or Scanner]. (5) Select a registered machine from the list.

When you have completed this operation, the unit is ready to be used on the client PC.

Delete from Azure Active Directory

This setting is available when the machine has already been registered for Universal Print Service.

To delete the machine from the Universal Print Service, in the web page (administrator), click [System Settings] → [Universal Print Settings], and then click the [Delete] key.

PRINTER JOBS

CHECKING THE PRINT STATUS

When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To check the status of a printer job, tap the [Print] tab. When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing, read "STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY (page 6-19)".

PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE

PDF encryption is used to protect a PDF file by requiring the entry of a password to print or edit the file. To directly print an encrypted PDF file on an FTP server or in a USB memory device, etc. connected to the machine, reset the password and begin printing.

• On the BP-50M26/BP-50M31/BP-50M36/BP-50M45/BP-50M55/BP-50M65, the PS3 expansion kit is required.
• To print an encrypted PDF file using the printer driver, enter the password when opening the file on your PC.
• Printing is not possible if you do not know the password for the encrypted PDF file.
• Encrypted PDF versions that can be directly printed are 1.6 (Adobe Acrobat 7.0) and earlier.

(1) Tap the Job status display and tap the [Print] tab. (2) Tap the [Spool] key.

When the list contains an encrypted PDF file, a message is displayed to indicate that an encrypted PDF file exists.

(3) Tap the print job key for the encrypted PDF file.

You cannot select multiple encrypted PDF files.

(4) Tap the [Enter Password for Encrypt PDF.] key on the action panel. (5) Enter the password (32 characters or less) and tap the [Yes] key.

When both a master password and a user password (which is used to open the file) have been set, enter the master password.

CHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUT

If printing stops because the machine ran out of paper, or if the size of paper specified in the printer driver is not loaded in the machine, a message will appear in the touch panel.

Printing will begin automatically when paper is loaded in the machine. If paper of the desired size is not immediately available, you can use paper that is set in a different tray.

If you changed to a different paper size, printing may not take place correctly; for example part of the text or image may run off the paper.

(1) Tap the job status display. (2) Tap the key of the job for which "Paper Empty" appeared. (3) Tap the [Reselect Paper] key on the action panel. (4) Tap the key for the tray containing the paper that you wish to use, and tap [OK].

PRINT RELEASE FUNCTION

PRINT RELEASE FUNCTION

When there are multiple machines that support the print release function on the same network, you can use the print release function to save data in the machine that is set as the primary unit and then print the saved data from secondary unit which you set (multiple secondary units can be set).

INTER-GROUP PRINTING

Primary and secondary units can be grouped.

Select a registered group, and use the print release function on the selected group.

Print release settings, such as Primary Unit, Secondary Unit, and group settings, can be configured from the web page (administrator) in [System Settings] → [Print Settings] → [Print Release Settings].

Print Release Settings (page 9-71)

For models that support the print release function, and for the number of secondary units that can be controlled by one primary unit, consult your dealer.

* Available for models with local drive.

• Up to 3 primary units can be set.
• Up to 10 groups can be registered into Inter-Group Printing.
• When user authentication is enabled, only jobs of the logged-in user can be printed.
• In an environment with mixed models, some printer drivers may not produce the expected print result.

BEFORE USING THE PRINT RELEASE FUNCTION

This section explains settings that must be configured before you can use the Print Release function.

Settings required on the machine

To use the print release function, configure in setting mode (administrator).

Fixing the IP address of the machine

If the machine is used in a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may change. If this happens, you will not be able to send print release information to the machine.

Adding the print release icon to the Home screen

This setting is not necessary if the print release icon has already been added.

1

Tap [Edit Home] on the action panel.

2

Tap a place without a shortcut key in home edit mode.

3

Tap [Print Release].

4

Tap the [Edit End] key.

Home Edit Mode is exited and you return to the home screen.

Installing the printer driver of the primary unit

Install the printer driver of the primary unit on your computer. For the procedures for installing the printer driver, see the Software Setup Guide.

USING THE PRINT RELEASE FUNCTION

This section explains how to store jobs in the primary unit, and how to select and print jobs from a secondary unit.

Storing a job in the primary unit from your computer

When user authentication is enabled in the machine, you must enter your user information (login name, password, etc.) in the settings screen of the printer driver in order to print.* For explanations of the settings, see "PRINTER FUNCTION (page 4-3)".

* The user information that is required varies depending on the enabled authentication method. Check with the machine administrator for this information.

Check the paper size and paper type used for printing.

Select a paper size and paper type that are supported by the machine to be used.

If you select a non-supported paper size or paper type, you may not be able to print.

In a Windows environment

1

Open the printer driver properties window.

(1) Select the printer driver of the Primary Unit. (2) Click the [Preferences] button.

2

Configure the print release function.

(1) Click the [Job Handling] tab. (2) Select the [Print Release] checkbox. (3) Enter user information as needed.

For more information, see "Authentication Settings (page 9-124)".

• The print release function cannot be used at the same time as the document filing function.
• You can change the number of copies at the time of printing.
• If you select the [Print Release] checkbox in [Printing Policy] on the [Configuration] tab, that function will always be enabled and information on various functions will no longer appear in the print settings screen.
• If less than 10 MB is free in the storage area of the primary unit, the job will not be stored. Delete unneeded jobs and print again.

3

Select any print settings that are needed, and click the [OK] button.

4

Start printing.

In a macOS environment

1

In the application, select [Print] from the [File] menu. Make sure that the machine's printer name is selected.

2

Configure the print release function.

(1) Select [Job Handling]. (2) Click [Retention]. (3) Select the [Print Release] checkbox. (4) Click [Authentication] and enter your user information as needed.

If user authentication is not enabled, this step can be omitted.

For more information, see "Authentication Settings (page 9-124)".

(5) Select any other print settings that are needed, and click the [Print] button.

• The print release function cannot be used at the same time as the document filing function.
• You can change the number of copies at the time of printing.
• If less than 10 MB is free in the storage area of the primary unit, the job will not be stored. Delete unneeded jobs and print again.

3

Start printing.

Printing/deleting a job stored in the primary unit from a secondary unit

This section explains how to print and delete a stored job from a secondary unit.

1

Tap the [Print Release] key on the Home screen.

• A list of the jobs stored in the primary unit appears. - If the main power of the primary unit is not on, a message will appear and you will not be able to view the stored jobs.

2

Print or delete the selected job.

(1) Tap the job you want to print or delete. The checkbox is selected √

You can select more than one job.

You can select all jobs with the [Select All] key.

(2) Configure print settings.

To delete the job from the primary unit after printing, select the [Print and Delete the Data] checkbox (this step is not necessary when only deleting the job).

(3) Start printing or deleting.

If you are deleting the job, a confirmation screen will appear. Select [Yes] to delete.

A: Machine icon

The communication status with the primary unit is displayed. By tapping the machine icon, detailed information is displayed.

B: Pull-down menu

Appears when the MFP group collaboration function is used. By selecting another MFP group in this pull-down menu, the print jobs of the other MFP groups are displayed.

When user authentication is enabled, only the print jobs of the logged-in user appear.

• If you selected a setting such as stapling that cannot be executed because the secondary unit does not have the necessary option, the setting will be disregarded.
• If the selected job is a PS file, the job will only be printed if the secondary unit supports PS file printing.

APPENDIX

PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS LIST

For information on the setting items, refer to printer driver Help.

PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS SCREEN / REFERRING TO HELP (page 4-6)

PS/Windows PPD/macOS PS: On the BP-50M26 / BP-50M31 / BP-50M36 / BP-50M45 / BP-50M55 / BP-50M65, the PS3 expansion kit is required. The specifications of each function in Windows PPD and macOS PS vary depending on the operating system version and the application.

Main

Function	PCL6	PS	Windows PPD	macOS PS
Copies 1-9999 1-9999 1-9999 1-9999
Collate Yes Yes Yes Yes
Original Size Yes Yes Yes Yes
Output Size Yes Yes Yes Yes
Orientation Yes Yes Yes Yes
Adjust to Paper Size Yes Yes No Yes
Zoom Yes Yes Yes Yes
2-Sided	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
N-Up	2, 4, 6, 8, 9, 16	2, 4, 6, 8, 9, 16	2, 4, 6, 9,16	2, 4, 6, 9,16
Staple	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
Document Filing	Yes	Yes	No	Yes

• Zoom (PCL6/Windows PPD): The horizontal and vertical proportion cannot be set separately.
• Staple: If an inner finisher, finisher or a saddle stitch finisher is installed (The punch module is also required in order to use the punch function.)

Paper Source

Function	PCL6	PS	Windows PPD	macOS PS
Output Size Yes Yes No No
Paper Tray Yes Yes Yes Yes
Paper Type Yes Yes Yes Yes
Tray Status Yes Yes No No
Force Letter-R for Letter Size	Yes	Yes	No	Yes

Finishing

Function	PCL6	PS	Windows PPD	macOS PS
Staple/Saddle Stitch Yes Yes Yes Yes
Punch Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fold Yes Yes Yes Yes
Offset Yes Yes Yes Yes
Output Yes Yes Yes Yes
Separator Page	Yes	Yes	No	Yes

• Staple/Punch: If an inner finisher, finisher or a saddle stitch finisher is installed. (The punch module is also required in order to use the punch function.)
• Fold: If a saddle stitch finisher is installed.

Layout

Function		PCL6	PS	Windows PPD	macOS PS
2-Sided		Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
Chapter Inserts		Yes	No	No	No
Booklet		Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
N-Up	Page No.	2, 4, 6, 8, 9, 16	2, 4, 6, 8, 9, 16	2, 4, 6, 9,16	2, 4, 6, 9,16
	Repeat	Yes	No	No	No
	Order	Yes	Yes	No	Yes
	Border	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
	N-Up with cover	Yes No No No
	100% N-Up	Yes	Yes	No	No
Poster Printing		Yes Yes No No
Print Position	Margin Shift	0mm to 30mm (0 inch to 1.2 inch)	0mm to 30mm (0 inch to 1.2 inch)	0mm to 30mm (0 inch to 1.2 inch)	0mm to 30mm (0 inch to 1.2 inch)
	Tab Shift	Yes Yes No No
	Custom	Yes Yes No No

Job Handling

Function	PCL6	PS	Windows PPD	macOS PS
Print Release Yes Yes No Yes
Document Filing Yes Yes No Yes
Create PDF for PC Browsing Yes No	No No
Print and Send Yes No No No
Notify Job End Yes Yes No No
Authentication Yes Yes No Yes

Inserts

Function	PCL6	PS	Windows PPD	macOS PS
Covers/Inserts Yes Yes Yes Yes
Transparency Inserts Yes Yes No Yes
Carbon Copy Yes Yes No No
Tab Paper Yes Yes Yes Yes

Covers/Inserts (Windows PPD/macOS PS): Only covers can be inserted.

Stamp

Function	PCL6	PS	Windows PPD	macOS PS
Watermark	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
Image Stamp	Yes Yes No No
Overlay	Yes Yes No No
Hidden Pattern	Yes	No	No	No
Copies Stamp	Yes	No	No	No

Image Quality

Function	PCL6	PS	Windows PPD	macOS PS
Print Mode	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
Graphics Mode	Yes	No	No	No
Bitmap Compression	Yes Yes No No
Sharpness	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
Screening	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
Smoothing	Yes Yes No No
Text To Black	Yes	Yes	No	No
Vector To Black	Yes Yes No No
Toner Save	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
Image Adjustment	Yes Yes No No
Font	Yes Yes No No
Line Width	Yes	No	No	No
Boldness Adjustment Yes Yes Yes Yes

Toner Save: This setting may not operate in some applications and operating systems.

Detailed Settings

Function	PCL6	PS	Windows PPD	macOS PS
Mirror Image No Yes Yes Yes
PS Error Information No Yes Yes No
PS Pass-Through No Yes No Yes
Job Compression No Yes No Yes
Tandem Print Yes Yes No No
Disable Blank Page Print Yes Yes No No
Custom Image Registration Yes No No No
Other Settings
• Input Resolution	Yes Yes No No
• Shade Pattern	Yes	No	No	No
• Spool Data Format	Yes Yes No No
• Printable Area	Yes Yes No No
• Rip Style	Yes Yes No No
• Duplex Style	Yes Yes No No
• Job Name Shortening	Yes Yes No No
• Use driver to render JPEGs	Yes	Yes	No	No
• Expand	No No No No
• Thicken Fine Lines	Yes	No	No	No
• Fine Text	Yes Yes Yes Yes
• Text/Line control	Yes Yes Yes Yes
• Text/Line knockout control	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
• Photo Image	Yes Yes Yes Yes
• Image Enhancement	Yes Yes Yes Yes
• Driver Setting Priority	Yes	Yes	No	No

SPECIFYING A BILLING CODE USING THE PRINTER DRIVER

You can enter a billing code using the printer driver of the machine.

For an overview of a billing code, refer to "BILLING CODE (page 8-25)".

Enable billing code

This setting is required only in the Windows environment. (Always usable under macOS environment)

1

Click the [Start] button, select [Settings] → [Device] → [Devices and Printers].

• In Windows 11, click the [Start] button, select [Bluetooth & devices] → [Printers & scanners].
• In Windows 8.1/Windows Server 2012, right-click the [Start] button, select [Control Panel] → [View devices and printers] (or [Devices and Printers]).

2

Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine and select [Printer Properties].

3

Specify a billing code

(1) Click the [Configuration] tab. (2) Click the [Printing Policy] button. (3) Set the [Billing Code] check box to (4) Click the [OK] button.

Windows

When printing starts, the billing code setting screen appears.

Enter the main code and sub code, and click the [OK] button.

To retain the specified billing code, set [Always Use This Billing Code] to

• You can click [Get Billing Code] to get the machine's billing code list and select the billing code from the list.
• If you have started printing without specifying a billing code, a use code is recorded in the job log.

macOS

(1) Select [Billing Code]. (2) Enter the main code and sub code.

AUTHENTICATION BY SINGLE SIGN-ON

When user authentication is used, you must enter your user name and password to print from a printer driver. The Single Sign-on function can be used when Active Directory authentication is used on both the machine and the computer.

When you use this function and print from the printer driver, the print job is sent to the machine using the authentication information that you used to log in to the computer. This allows easy printing of jobs from the printer driver without the need to enter your user name or password each time you print when user authentication is enabled.

Authentication by Single Sign-on requires that Active Directory authentication be performed on the machine and your computer. This can only be used when your computer is running Windows.

Settings

Active Directory must be enabled on the machine in advance. For information on Active Directory, refer to "ACTIVE DIRECTORY LINKING FUNCTION (page 8-24)". After enabling Active Directory, configure the settings below in the printer driver.

(1) Click the [Start] button, select [Settings] → [Device] → [Devices and Printers].

• In Windows 11, click the [Start] button, select [Bluetooth & devices] → [Printers & scanners].
• In Windows 8.1/Windows Server 2012, right-click the [Start] button, select [Control Panel] → [View devices and printers] (or [Devices and Printers]).

(2) Right-click the machine's printer driver icon and select [Printer Properties].

The printer properties appear.

(3) Click the [Configuration] tab.

(4) Set the [Single Sign-on] checkbox to .

Authentication Option

For the authentication method, refer to "PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED (page 4-9)".

(1) Click the [Job Handling] tab.

(2) In [Authentication], select [Single Sign-on].

• Single Sign-on authentication is also possible from the Job Handling dialog box and the User Authentication dialog box.
• When Single Sign-on is enabled, [Print and Send] cannot be used.
• If you logged in to the machine in advance before using Single Sign-on, you will have the permissions of the user account you used to log in. If you use Single Sign-on without logging in to the machine, the user permissions will be those of "User". This may limit the functions that you can use.
• If Single Sign-on is used without logging in to the machine, the user name in the job log will be the name set by the printer driver. If the user name is not set by the printer driver, the user name in the job log will be the computer login name.